7 Series
Owner's Manual for the vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
You can find supplementary information in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.
Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
© 2016 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/16, 07 16 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 318.
6 Information
At a glance
14 Cockpit
19 Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready
state
21 iDrive
30 BMW Gesture Control
33 Voice activation system
36 BMW Touch Command
38 General settings
51 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Controls
56 Opening and closing
80 Settings
98 Transporting children safely
102 Driving
119 Displays
134 Lights
141 Safety
169 Driving stability control systems
173 Driver assistance systems
210 Driving comfort
212 Climate control
225 Interior equipment
235 Storage compartments
240 Cargo area
Driving tips
248 Things to remember when driving
253 Saving fuel
Mobility
262 Refueling
264 Fuel
266 Wheels and tires
288 Engine compartment
290 Engine oil
294 Coolant
296 Maintenance
298 Replacing components
301 Breakdown assistance
307 Care
Reference
314 Technical data
317 Appendix
318 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the fol‐
lowing Owner's Manuals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
on the Control Display.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Additional sources of
information
Dealer’s service center
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
additional questions at any time.
Internet
Owner's Manual and general information about
BMW, such as about the technology, in the In‐
ternet: www.bmwusa.com.
BMW Driver’s Guide App
The Owner's Manual is available
in many countries as an app. Ad‐
ditional information on the Inter‐
net:
www.bmw.com/
bmw_drivers_guide
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Seite 6
Information
6
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out
in the defined order.
1. First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
ternative possibilities are presented as list with
bullet points.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes
and illustrates features and functions that are
not available in your vehicle, e.g., because of
the selected optional features or the country-
specific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable country provisions must be ob‐
served.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some control ele‐
ments are arranged differently from what is
shown in the illustrations.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
Own safety
Intended use
Observe the following when using the vehicle:
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
▷ The laws and safety standards applicable
in the country, where the vehicle is driven.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu‐
ments.
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
Seite 7
Information
7
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
ments applying in the country of first delivery,
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
to be operated in a different country it might be
necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially
differing operating conditions and permit re‐
quirements. If your vehicle does not comply
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
formation on warranty is available from a
dealer’s service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
a BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose
to use another service facility, BMW recom‐
mends use of a facility that performs work, e.g.,
maintenance and repair, according to BMW
specifications with properly trained personnel,
referred to in this Owner's Manual as "another
qualified service center or repair shop".
If work, e.g., maintenance and repair, is per‐
formed improperly, there is a risk of subse‐
quent damage and related safety risks.
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐
cessory products approved by BMW.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice
on their use and installation are available from
a BMW dealer's service center.
BMW parts and accessories have been tested
by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
vehicles.
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
sories.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐
ual product from another manufacturer can be
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
whether these products are suitable for BMW
vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
Seite 8
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please contact
Customer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
Many electronic components on your vehicle
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
and faults. This technical information generally
records the state of a component, a module, a
system or the environment:
▷ Operating states of system components,
e.g., fill levels.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from
its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐
tion speed, wheel speed, deceleration,
transverse acceleration.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or en‐
gagement of the stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
This data is purely technical in nature and is
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
routes traveled cannot be created from this
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
pair services, service processes, warranty
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
mation can be read out from the event and
fault memories by employees of a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer,
using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain
further information there if you need it. After an
error is corrected, the information in the fault
memory is deleted or overwritten on a continu‐
ous basis.
With the vehicle in use there are situations
where you can associate this technical data
with individuals if combined with other infor‐
mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the
vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with
the assistance of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer — such as vehicle
emergency locating — allow certain vehicle
data to be transmitted from the vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
Seite 9
Information
9
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment.
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
Seite 10
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 11
Information
11
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. Moreover, you will become familiar with
the available control concepts and options
quickly.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Seating comfort features
Gentleman function 82
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel
memory 92
Massage function 93
2 Roller sunblind in the rear win‐
dow 76
3 Safety switch for the windows
and roller sunblinds 75
4 Power windows 74
5 Exterior mirror operation 90
6 Lights
Front fog lights 138
Night Vision 152
Seite 14
At a glance Cockpit
14
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Light switch 134
Lights off
Daytime running lights 136
Parking lights 134
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 135
Adaptive Light Control 136
High-beam Assistant 136
Low beams 134
Instrument lighting 138
Right roadside parking
lamp 135
Left roadside parking lamp 135
7 Central locking system
Unlock 64
Lock 64
8 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 108
High beams, head‐
light flasher 108
High-beam Assistant 136
Onboard computer 128
9 Steering wheel buttons, left
Cruise control on/off 173
Active Cruise Control on/off 175
Steering and lane control assis‐
tant on/off 182
Cruise control: store speed
Pause or continue cruise control
Active Cruise Control: increase
distance
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis‐
tance
With steering and lane control as‐
sistant: adjust distance
Cruise control rocker switch
10 Instrument cluster 119
11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source
Volume
Voice activation system 33
Telephone
Thumbwheel for selection lists 127
12 Steering column stalk, right
Seite 15
Cockpit At a glance
15
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Wiper 108
Rain sensor 109
Clean the windshield and head‐
lights 110
13 Switch drive-ready state on/
off 102
Auto Start/Stop function 103
14 Horn, entire surface
15 Steering wheel heating 92
16 Adjust steering wheel 92
17 Unlock hood 289
18 Open/close tailgate 68
19 Glove compartment 236
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 21
2 Ventilation 216
Seite 16
At a glance Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
3 Hazard warning system 301
Intelligent Safety 144
NFC antenna 44
4 Glove compartment 235
5 Radio
Multimedia
6 Automatic climate control 212
7 Controller with buttons 22
8 Parking brake 105
Automatic Hold 106
9 PDC Park Distance Control 185
Without Surround View: rearview
camera 190
Surround View 192
Crossing traffic warning 207
Parking assistant 198
Parking assistant Plus 203
Surround View: Panorama
View 192
Air suspension level adjust‐
ment 210
10 Driving Dynamics Control 116
SPORT driving mode
COMFORT driving mode
ECO PRO driving mode
ADAPTIVE driving mode
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 169
11 Steptronic transmission selector
lever 112
Seite 17
Cockpit At a glance
17
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Intelligent emergency call 301
2 Glass sunroof 77
3 Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐
senger airbag 144
4 Reading lights 139
5 Open rear sliding visor 78
Close rear sliding visor 78
6 Interior lights 138
Seite 18
At a glance Cockpit
18
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready
state
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
General information
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in
one of the three states:
▷ Idle state.
▷ Standby state.
▷ Drive-ready state.
Idle state
Concept
If the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched off.
All electronic systems/power consumers are
deactivated.
General information
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening
from the outside and after exiting and locking.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Automatic idle state
The idle state is automatically established un‐
der the following conditions:
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes
place on the vehicle.
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is
low.
▷ Depending on the setting via iDrive, if one
of the front doors is opened when exiting
the vehicle.
The idle state is not automatically established
while a phone call is active.
Seite 19
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state At a glance
19
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Establishing idle state when opening
the front doors
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Turn off after door opening"
Manual idle state
To establish idle state in the vehicle after end
of trip:
Hold button down until the OFF
indicator on the instrument clus‐
ter goes out.
Standby state
Concept
When standby state is switched on, most func‐
tions can be used while the vehicle is station‐
ary. Desired settings can be adjusted.
General information
The vehicle is in standby state after opening
the front doors.
Display
OFF is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
switched off and standby state
switched on.
Drive-ready state
Concept
Switching on drive-ready state corresponds to
starting the engine.
General information
Some functions, such as DSC, can only be
used with drive-ready state switched on.
Follow further information on the drive-ready
state, refer to page 102.
Switching on drive-ready state
Drive-ready state is switched on
via the Start/Stop button:
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Switching off drive-ready state
Press the Start/Stop button to switch off drive-
ready state. The vehicle switches into standby
state.
Seite 20
At a glance Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state
20
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
iDrive
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. These functions can be operated via
the controller or touchscreen.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information
systems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary,
stop and use the systems and devices while
the vehicle is stationary.◀
Operation
Overview
1 Control Display with touchscreen
2 Controller with buttons and touchpad
Control Display
General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions, refer to page 310.
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, e.g., due to intense solar radi‐
ation, the brightness may be reduced down to
complete deactivation. Once the temperature
is reduced, e.g., through shadow or climate
control system, the normal functions are re‐
stored.
Safety information
NOTE
Objects in the area in the front of the
Control Display can shift and damage the Con‐
trol Display. There is a risk of property damage.
Do not place objects in the area in front of the
Control Display.◀
Switching on
1.
Turn on standby state.
2. Press the controller.
Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
21
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Switching off
1.
Press button.
2. "Turn off control display"
Controller
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller, refer to
page 26.
Operation
▷ Turn.
▷ Press.
▷ Move in four directions.
Buttons on the controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: open recently used me‐
nus.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Open destination input menu for
navigation.
Open navigation map.
Open previous panel.
Open the Options menu.
Seite 22
At a glance iDrive
22
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Operating with the controller
Opening the main menu
Press button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1.
Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"iDrive settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "iDrive
settings", a new panel is displayed.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Closes current panel and shows previous
display.
▷
Press button.
The previous display opens.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
New display is opened.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐
cate that additional panels can be opened.
Opening recently used menus
The recently used menus can be displayed.
Press button twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
The Options menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, e.g., for "Media/Radio".
Seite 23
iDrive At a glance
23
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Save station".
Changing settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐
tion.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
controller or the touchscreen.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Input
1.
Turn the controller: select a letter or num‐
ber.
2. : confirm entry.
Deleting
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the let‐
ter or number.
Hold the controller down: delete all
letters or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers.
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐
tered and letters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry
for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be
entered in all languages that are available
in iDrive.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en‐
tries, the letters for which there is an entry are
displayed at the left edge.
1.
Turn the controller to the left or right
quickly.
All letters for which there are entries are
displayed on the left edge.
Seite 24
At a glance iDrive
24
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
played.
Operating via touchscreen
General information
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
screen.
Touch screen with your fingers. Do not use
any objects.
Opening the main menu
Tap on symbol.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Selecting menu items
Tap desired menu item.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"iDrive settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, a new panel is
displayed.
The white arrow indicates that additional pan‐
els can be called up.
▷ Swipe to the left.
▷ Tap on symbol.
New display is opened.
Opening recently used menus
Tap on symbol twice.
Changing settings
Settings such as volumes can be changed via
the touchscreen.
▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or
left, until the desired setting is displayed.
▷ , Tap on symbol.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐
tion.
Seite 25
iDrive At a glance
25
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
controller or the touchscreen.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol: delete the let‐
ter or number.
Tapping and holding the symbol for
an extended period: delete all letters
or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Operating navigation map
The navigation map can be moved with the
touchscreen.
Function Operation
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin‐
gers.
Rotate map. Move two fingers in a cir‐
cle.
Touchpad
General information
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller.
Selecting functions
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Touchpad"
4. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ "Map": use the map.
▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
▷ "Search fields": write letters without
selecting the list field.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. For
entries, it may be necessary to change be‐
tween upper and lower-case letters, num‐
bers and characters, refer to page 24.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. The set language
determines what input is possible. Where
necessary, enter special characters via the
controller.
Seite 26
At a glance iDrive
26
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Entering special characters
Input Operation
Delete a charac‐
ter.
Swipe to the left on the
touchpad.
Enter a blank
space.
Swipe to the right in the
center of the touchpad.
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touch‐
pad.
Enter an under‐
score.
Swipe to the right in the
lower area of the touch‐
pad.
Using the map and Internet
You can use the touch pad to move the map in
the navigation system and scroll around in In‐
ternet pages.
Function Operation
Move map or Internet
pages.
Swipe in the appro‐
priate direction.
Enlarge/shrink map or
Internet pages.
Drag in or out on
the touchpad with
fingers.
Display the menu or
open a link on the Inter‐
net.
Tap once.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed in sev‐
eral menus on the right side of the split screen,
e.g., information from the onboard computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when switching to another menu.
Switching the split screen on/off
1.
Press button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
The display can be selected in menus, where
the split screen is supported.
1. Move the controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select the desired setting.
Specifying the number of displays
It is possible to specify the number of displays.
1.
Move the controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. Move the controller to the left.
Status information
General information
The status field can be found in the upper area
of the Control Display. Status information is
displayed in the form of symbols.
Seite 27
iDrive At a glance
27
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Status field symbols
Radio
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Telephone
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Cellular network is not available.
Roaming is active.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
Reminder.
Sending not possible.
Contacts are loaded.
Entertainment
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
AUX-IN port.
AUX-IN port in the front or in the
rear.
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Online Entertainment.
Symbol Meaning
WiFi.
iPod.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
Spoken instructions are turned off.
Request for the current vehicle po‐
sition.
Checking the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and menu entries or
pages in the Integrated Owner's Manual.
Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Saving a function
1.
Select function via iDrive.
2.
Press and hold the desired button
until a signal sounds.
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately. This
means, e.g., that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
Seite 28
At a glance iDrive
28
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves
or use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments
1.
Press and hold buttons 1 and simulta‐
neously for approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Seite 29
iDrive At a glance
29
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
BMW Gesture Control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Concept
Several iDrive functions can be operated by
hand motion only using BMW Gesture Control.
Overview
The gestures that are performed underneath
the interior mirror are captured by a camera in
the roofliner.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Gestures"
4. "Gesture control"
Settings
▷ "Display tips": the possible gesture is
shown on the Control Display.
▷ "Audio feedback": an acoustic signal is
emitted once the gesture is recognized.
Seite 30
At a glance BMW Gesture Control
30
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Possible gestures
Gesture Operation Function
Move index finger forward and backward in the direc‐
tion of the screen.
Accept call.
Confirm Check Control
message.
Swipe with the hand across the width of the Control
Display in the direction of the front-passenger side.
Reject call.
Close popup.
Slowly move forearm clockwise in a circular pattern
with the index finger stretched out forward.
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Increase the volume.
Slowly move forearm counterclockwise in a circular
pattern with the index finger stretched out forward.
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Reduce the volume.
Pinch with thumb and index finger and move hand hor‐
izontally to the right or left.
Surround View: turn
camera view.
This gesture can only be
executed while the vehi‐
cle is stationary.
Move stretched out index and middle finger forward. Individually assignable
gesture.
Perform gestures underneath the interior mir‐
ror and next to the steering wheel.
Execute gestures clearly.
The gestures can also be executed from the
front-passenger side.
Assigning gesture individually
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Gestures"
Seite 31
BMW Gesture Control At a glance
31
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
4. "Function assignment"
5. Select the desired setting.
System limits
Gesture recognition by the camera can be dis‐
turbed by the following circumstances:
▷ The camera lens is covered.
▷ Objects are located on the rear-view mir‐
ror.
▷ The camera lens is dirty. Clean the camera
lenses, refer to page 310.
▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de‐
tection range.
▷ Wearing of gloves or jewelry.
▷ Smoking in the vehicle's interior.
Seite 32
At a glance BMW Gesture Control
32
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Concept
Most functions displayed on the Control Dis‐
play can be operated by voice commands via
the voice activation system. The system sup‐
ports you with announcements during input.
General information
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the
voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal
instructions to use with the voice activation
system.
Functional requirements
To enable voice command recognition, a lan‐
guage must be set via iDrive that is supported
by the voice activation system.
To set the language, refer to page 38.
Using the voice activation
system
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
A command that is recognized by the voice
activation system is announced and dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster
indicates that the voice activation system is
active.
If no other commands are possible, operate
the function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be spo‐
ken.
You may select list entries such as phone list
entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐
tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the
respective list.
Displaying possible commands
The following is displayed in the top area of the
Control Display:
Seite 33
Voice activation system At a glance
33
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ Possible commands for the current menu.
▷ Possible commands from other menus.
▷ Status of the voice recognition.
▷ Status of the encrypted connection.
Help on the voice activation system
▷ To have the available spoken instructions
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹.
▷ To have information on the operating prin‐
ciple of the voice activation system read
out loud: ›General information on voice
control‹.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹.
Example: opening the tone
settings
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller.
1.
Turn on the Entertainment sound output, if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Media and radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Settings
Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dialog
or a short version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays
back short messages in abbreviated form.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speech mode:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Selecting the input language
For some languages, the input language can
be selected.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Voice control:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Activating an encrypted connection
By activating an encrypted connection, the
quality of voice recognition will be improved.
Offboard voice processing enables use of the
dictating function and allows destinations to be
input in a naturally spoken way. To use the
functions, data is transmitted to the Nuance
service provider and locally stored there.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Offboard voice processing"
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
voice activation system. The function can be
deactivated if inquiries are often undesirably
interrupted, e.g., due to background noise or
talking.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speaking during voice output"
Seite 34
At a glance Voice activation system
34
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Information for Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 301, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 35
Voice activation system At a glance
35
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
BMW Touch Command
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Concept
The BMW Touch Command is a tablet com‐
puter, which can be used to operate important
vehicle functions.
▷ Seat adjustments for front passenger seat
and seats in the rear.
▷ Climate control in the rear.
▷ Sun protection.
▷ Ambient light.
▷ Ambient highlight.
▷ Bowers & Wilkins loudspeaker lighting.
▷ Audio sources in the front.
▷ Rear entertainment.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, BMW
Touch Command is located in the rear console
or in the center armrest in the rear.
The following functions can be used via
BMW Touch Command.
▷ Seat adjustments for front passenger seat
and seats in the rear.
▷ Climate control in the rear.
▷ Sun protection.
▷ Ambient light.
▷ Ambient highlight.
▷ Bowers & Wilkins loudspeaker lighting.
▷ Audio sources in the front.
▷ Rear entertainment.
Overview
Operation
1 BMW Touch Command
2 Switching on/off
3 Removing
Tray
The tray in the center armrest in the rear has
the following functions:
▷ Storage and locking.
▷ Recharging the battery.
Insert BMW Touch Command into the tray
with the screen facing upward to ensure
proper locking. To charge the battery, insert
BMW Touch Command with the multifunction
socket to the left.
Seite 36
At a glance BMW Touch Command
36
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Button and softkeys on the
BMW Touch Command
Button Function
Display BMW application, press but‐
ton twice as needed.
Softkey Function
Display list of last used applications.
Back.
Operation
Concept
1.
Press button.
The main menu of the BMW application is
displayed.
2. Swipe to the left or right to display further
menus.
3. Tap on the desired menu.
4. Adjust the settings.
Exiting the BMW application
Tap on menu item: "Apps"
Further information is displayed.
Language setting
The menu language depends on the iDrive set‐
tings.
Resetting to factory settings
BMW Touch Command can be reset to factory
settings.
All data and personal settings in the device
memory are deleted and the connection to the
vehicle is interrupted.
1.
"Settings"
2. Tap on symbol.
3. "Reset to factory settings"
Seite 37
BMW Touch Command At a glance
37
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
General settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Language
Setting the language
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 34.
Time
Setting the time zone
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
5. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
6. Press the controller.
7. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
8. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time format
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features: setting the clock time
display
The clock time can be displayed in analog or
digital form.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
Seite 38
At a glance General settings
38
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Time"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Automatic time setting"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Date
Setting the date
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
6. Press the controller.
7. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the date format
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the units of
measurement
The units of measurement for different values
can be adjusted, e.g., fuel consumption, dis‐
tances, and temperature.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Activating/deactivating the
display of the current vehicle
position
If GPS geolocation has been activated, the cur‐
rent vehicle position can be displayed in the re‐
spective ConnectedDrive app or in the Con‐
nectedDrive customer portal.
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "GPS tracking"
4. "GPS tracking"
Seite 39
General settings At a glance
39
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Activating/deactivating
information windows
Information windows are automatically shown
on the Control Display for some functions.
Some of these information windows can be ac‐
tivated or deactivated.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Pop-ups"
4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Control Display
Brightness
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Screensaver
If no settings are made via iDrive, a screensa‐
ver will be displayed after an adjustable time.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Screensaver"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Messages
Concept
The menu centrally displays all messages ar‐
riving in the vehicle in list form.
General information
The following messages can be displayed:
▷ Traffic messages.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Communication messages, e.g., e-mail,
SMS or reminders.
▷ Service requirements messages.
Messages are additionally displayed in the sta‐
tus field.
Retrieving messages
Via iDrive:
1.
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
The respective menu is opened, where the
message is displayed.
Deleting messages
All messages, except Check Control mes‐
sages, can be deleted from the list. Check
Control messages are displayed as long as
they are relevant.
Via iDrive:
1.
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
Seite 40
At a glance General settings
40
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
3.
Press button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications"
Settings
The following settings can be adjusted:
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
sages will be permitted.
▷ Sort the messages according to date or
priority.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting.
Data protection
Data transfer
Concept
The vehicle offers different functions, whose
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv‐
ice provider. This data transfer can be deacti‐
vated.
General information
The data transfer can be deactivated for some
functions. With data transfer deactivated, the
respective function cannot be used.
Functional requirement
Settings can only be adjusted while stationary.
Activating/deactivating the data
transfer
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1. Turn on standby state.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.
Deleting personal data in the vehicle
Concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
This personal data can be permanently deleted
using iDrive.
General information
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored Favorites buttons.
▷ Travel and onboard computer information.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, e.g., stored destinations.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, e.g., Favorites, cookies.
▷ Office data, e.g., voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 15 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display.
Seite 41
General settings At a glance
41
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Via iDrive:
1. Turn on standby state.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings"
4. "Delete personal data"
5. "Delete personal data"
6. "OK"
7. Exit and lock the vehicle.
After 15 minutes, the deletion process is com‐
pleted.
If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the de‐
letion.
Canceling deletion
Switch on the drive-ready state to cancel dele‐
tion of the data.
Connections
Concept
Mobile devices, such as mobile phones or lap‐
tops, can be connected and used in the vehicle
in various ways.
General information
The following connection types require one-
time pairing with the vehicle:
▷ Bluetooth.
▷ Screen Mirroring.
▷ Internet hotspot.
▷ Apple CarPlay
Paired devices are automatically recognized
later on and connected to the vehicle.
The following functions are possible:
Connection type Function
Mobile phone via
Bluetooth.
Making calls.
Office functions.
Audio player via
Bluetooth or USB
port.
Playing music.
Smartphone via
Screen Mirroring
Mirroring (output) of
the smartphone dis‐
play on the Control
Display.
Smartphone or USB
device via USB port.
Playing videos.
Smartphone via
Bluetooth or USB
port.
Using apps.
Mobile device via
the Internet hotspot.
Using the Internet.
BMW Touch Com‐
mand via WiFi.
Using vehicle func‐
tions.
USB memory device
via USB port.
Exporting and import‐
ing driver profiles.
Performing software
updates.
Exporting and import‐
ing stored trips.
Playing music.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information
systems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary,
stop and use the systems and devices while
the vehicle is stationary.◀
Seite 42
At a glance General settings
42
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Displaying the device list
All devices paired with or connected to the ve‐
hicle are displayed in the device list.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
A symbol indicates, for which function a device
is used.
Symbol Function
"Telephone"
"Additional telephone"
"Bluetooth® audio"
"Apps"
"Screen Mirroring"
"Internet hotspot"
"Touch Command"
Bluetooth connection
Compatible devices
General information
Details on which mobile phones and mobile
devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup‐
ported can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/
bluetooth.
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed
or deviating software versions.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
The vehicle identification number and software
part number are needed to determine which
devices are supported. The software version of
the mobile phone may also be required.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"
A software update, refer to page 48, can be
performed, if needed.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 43.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle, re‐
fer to page 43, and on the device.
▷ Bluetooth pre-settings may be required on
the device, e.g., visibility, refer to the own‐
er's manual of the device.
Switching on Bluetooth
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"
Activating/deactivating telephone
functions
To use all supported functions of a mobile
phone, the following functions must be acti‐
vated prior to pairing the mobile phone with
the vehicle.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select desired setting:
Seite 43
General settings At a glance
43
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ "Office"
Activate function to transmit short
messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,
notes, and reminders to the vehicle.
Costs can be incurred by transmitting
all data to the vehicle.
▷ "Contact images"
Activate function to show the contact
pictures.
6. Move the controller to the left.
Pairing the mobile device with the
vehicle
Pair the mobile device on the front or rear Con‐
trol Display.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. Select the functions for which the device is
to be used:
▷ "Telephone"
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
▷ "Apps"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity
of the mobile device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile device display.
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number
must be entered.
▷ Compare the control number displayed
on the Control Display with the control
number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the de‐
vice and on the Control Display.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control
number on the device and via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in
the device list.
If pairing was unsuccessful: frequently asked
questions, refer to page 49.
Near-field communication, NFC
Concept
With near-field communication, NFC, data can
be transmitted over short distances using radio
technology. This function significantly simpli‐
fies pairing a mobile device with the vehicle.
Overview
The NFC antenna is in the instrument panel
below the hazard warning flashers button.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 43.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth pre-settings may be required on
the device, e.g., visibility, refer to the own‐
er's manual of the device.
Pairing the mobile device with the vehicle
1.
Activate the NFC function on the device,
see the owner's manual of the device.
2. Hold the device close to the NFC antenna.
3. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number may be displayed.
Seite 44
At a glance General settings
44
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ Compare the control number on the
Control Display with the control num‐
ber on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the mo‐
bile device.
▷ Confirm the connection on the mobile
device.
Depending on which functions are already oc‐
cupied by other mobile devices, the device is
connected with the phone, additional phone, or
music function.
If pairing was unsuccessful: frequently asked
questions, refer to page 49.
USB connection
General information
Mobile devices with USB port can be con‐
nected to the USB interface, refer to
page 231.
▷ Mobile phones supported by the USB in‐
terface.
The snap-in adapter features a separate
USB port that is automatically connected
when a compatible mobile phone is in‐
serted.
▷ Audio devices with USB port, e.g., MP3
player.
▷ USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported.
FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended
formats.
Information about compatible USB media can
be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
The following applications are possible:
▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, re‐
fer to page 69.
▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
▷ Playing videos via USB video.
▷ Loading of software updates, refer to
page 48.
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against
mechanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB media
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that every device is operable on the
vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high
temperatures; refer to the device owner's
manual.
▷ Due to the many different compression
techniques, proper playback of the media
stored on the USB storage device cannot
be guaranteed in all cases.
▷ A connected USB storage device will be
supplied with charging current via the USB
interface if the device supports this.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the
stored data, do not charge a USB storage
device via the onboard socket, when it is
connected to the USB interface.
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device
should be used, settings may be required
on the USB storage device, refer to the de‐
vice owner's manual.
Not compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ MTP devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lights.
Connecting the device
Connect the USB storage device using a suita‐
ble adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to
page 231.
Seite 45
General settings At a glance
45
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
The USB storage device is connected to the
vehicle and displayed in the device list.
Internet connection
General information
Up to 8 devices can be connected with the In‐
ternet hotspot.
Functional requirements
▷ ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ Data contract with a service provider.
▷ WiFi-capable device.
▷ WiFi activated on the device.
▷ Internet hotspot activated in the vehicle.
▷ Standby state switched on.
Activating the Internet hotspot
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Internet hotspot"
Connecting a device with the Internet
hotspot
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. "Internet hotspot"
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for WiFi networks on the device.
Select network name on the device.
7. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐
nect.
With the first Internet usage via the Internet
hotspot, data volume must be purchased from
a service provider.
All devices connected via the Internet hotspot
use this data volume.
If necessary, data volume can be purchased
from the ConnectedDrive Store.
Settings
The network name and hotspot code can be
changed. In addition, the network name can be
hidden so that it cannot be found by other de‐
vices.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4.
Press button.
5.
▷ "Change hotspot key"
Enter the desired hotspot code.
▷ "Change hotspot name"
Enter the desired network name.
▷ "Hide hotspot"
Activate or deactivate the function.
6. Confirm the entry of the hotspot code or
network name:
Select the symbol.
Screen Mirroring
General information
Screen Mirroring enables mirroring (output‐
ting) of the smartphone display on the Control
Display.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible smartphone supporting
Screen Mirroring.
▷ Screen Mirroring is switched on on the
smartphone.
Seite 46
At a glance General settings
46
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ WiFi is switched on in the vehicle.
Switching on WiFi
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Vehicle Wi-Fi®"
Pairing a smartphone with Screen
Mirroring
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. "Screen Mirroring"
The WiFi name of the vehicle is displayed
on the Control Display.
6. Search for WiFi devices in the surround‐
ings of the smartphone.
The WiFi name of the vehicle appears on
the device display. Select the WiFi name of
the vehicle.
7. Confirm the connection via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in
the device list.
Additional functions
Following the initial pairing
▷ The device is connected with the vehicle
within a short period of time if the engine is
running or standby state is switched on.
▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the
mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle
after recognition.
▷ For some devices, certain settings may be
necessary, e.g., authorization, see owner's
manual of the device.
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are au‐
tomatically recognized and reconnected
when standby state is switched on.
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
5. Select the desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a device, the func‐
tion will be deactivated where appropriate for a
device that is already connected and the de‐
vice will be disconnected.
Connecting a specific device
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Connect device"
The functions that were assigned to the device
before disconnecting are assigned to the de‐
vice when it is reconnected. If the device is al‐
ready connected, these functions are deacti‐
vated.
Disconnecting the device
The connection of the device to the vehicle is
disconnected.
The device remains paired and can be con‐
nected again, refer to page 47.
Seite 47
General settings At a glance
47
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device"
Deleting the device
The device is disconnected and removed from
the device list.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"
Swapping the telephone and
additional phone
If two mobile phones are connected to the ve‐
hicle, the functions of the phone and additional
phone can be switched.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."
Software update
General information
The vehicle supports a large number of mobile
devices, e.g., mobile phones and MP3 players.
Software updates are available for many of the
supported devices. The vehicle is maintained
up-to-date via regular vehicle software up‐
dates.
Updates and related current information is
available at www.bmw.com/update.
Displaying the installed software
version
The software version installed in the vehicle is
displayed.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Show current version"
If an update has been carried out before, select
the desired version to display additional infor‐
mation.
Updating software via USB
The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
Via iDrive:
1.
Store the file for the software update in the
main directory of a USB flash drive.
2. Connect the USB storage device to a USB
interface, refer to page 231.
3. "My Vehicle"
4. "iDrive settings"
5. "Software update"
6. "Update software"
7. "USB"
8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
10. Wait for the update to complete.
11. Confirm system restart.
Updating software via BMW
TeleService
Updating software via BMW TeleServices is
country-specific and may not be available.
The software is first transferred into the vehicle
and can then be installed. The software can be
installed at a time different from the time of
transfer.
Seite 48
At a glance General settings
48
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
The software can be transferred while driving,
and if the trip is interrupted it will resume auto‐
matically the next time the vehicle is driven. All
other functions remain available during the
transfer. Mobile cellular reception must be
available for the transfer to take place.
The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
Via iDrive:
1. Turn on standby state.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings"
4. "Software update"
5. "Update software"
6. "Teleservices"
7. "Load update"
The update is loaded but not installed.
8. The update can be installed or removed.
▷ "Install software"
The loaded update is installed.
This step can be carried out at a later
point in time.
▷ "Remove update"
The loaded update is removed.
The following steps are omitted.
9. "OK"
10. Wait for the update to complete.
11. Confirm system restart.
Restoring the software version
The software version before the last software
update and the version before the first soft‐
ware update can be restored.
The software may only be restored when the
vehicle is stationary.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5.
▷ "Previous version"
The previous software version is re‐
stored.
▷ "Default software settings"
The first software version is restored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. Confirm system restart.
Frequently asked questions
Information on compatible mobile phones, re‐
fer to page 43.
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as
expected.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
connected?
▷ Check that WiFi is activated in the vehicle.
Activate WiFi in the vehicle.
▷ Check that Screen Mirroring is activated
on the mobile phone.
Activate Screen Mirroring on the mobile
phone.
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices
connected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
Delete connections with other devices, if
needed.
▷ Delete all known Bluetooth connections
from the device list on the mobile phone
prior to connecting.
Start new device search.
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode
or has only a limited remaining battery life.
Seite 49
General settings At a glance
49
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Charge the mobile phone in the snap-in
adapter, wireless charging tray or via the
charging cable.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is pos‐
sible that only one mobile phone can be
connected to the vehicle.
Unpair the connected mobile phone from
the vehicle and pair and connect only one
mobile phone.
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do
not function anymore.
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Possibly too high or too low ambient tem‐
peratures for mobile phone operation.
Do not subject the mobile phone to ex‐
treme ambient temperatures.
Why are no telephone functions available?
▷ The mobile phone may not be properly
configured, e.g., as Bluetooth audio device.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
phone or additional phone function.
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
played or why are they incomplete?
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
from social networks.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, e.g.,
due to stored information such as notes.
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
audio source or as telephone.
Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with the telephone or additional phone
function.
Why is the phone connection quality poor?
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
on the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console.
▷ Insert mobile phone into the wireless
charging tray.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately in the sound set‐
tings.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available, con‐
tact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 50
At a glance General settings
50
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. It specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle.
Components of the Integrated
Owner's Manual
General information
The Integrated owner's manual consists of
four parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or possible access.
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion on how to operate the vehicle, how to use
basic vehicle functions and what to do in case
of a breakdown. This information can also be
displayed while driving.
Search by images
Based on illustrations, image search provides
information and descriptions. This is useful,
e.g., when the terminology for a feature is not
known.
Keyword search
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
Videos
The basic functions of selected systems are
explained in the videos.
Select components
1.
Press button.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select the desired setting.
Scrolling through the owner's manual
Turn the controller, until the next or previous
contents are displayed.
Context help - operating instructions
for the currently selected function
General information
The relevant information can be opened di‐
rectly.
Opening via iDrive
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the Options menu:
1. Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Seite 51
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
51
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Changing between a function and the
operating instructions
To switch from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
alternate between the two displays:
1.
Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press button again to return to last
displayed function.
5.
Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate permanently between the last dis‐
played function and the Owner's Manual re‐
peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every
time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The jumps into the Owner's Manual can be
stored on the programmable memory buttons,
refer to page 28, and called up directly.
Storing
1.
Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Animations"
2.
Press desired button and hold for
more than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press the corresponding button.
The owner's manual is directly dis‐
played at the selected entry point.
Seite 52
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
52
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Seite 53
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
53
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Controls
The information in this chapter helps you in
confidently operating your vehicle. All features
and accessories that are useful for driving and
your safety, comfort and convenience are
described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Remote control
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key.
Each remote control contains a replaceable
battery. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 58.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. Settings, refer to page 71.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Driver profile, refer to
page 69.
The remote controls hold information about re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐
mote control, refer to page 296.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. The vehicle can then not be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
remote control with you so that the vehicle can
be opened from the outside.◀
WARNING
For some country-specific variants, un‐
locking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
Seite 56
Controls Opening and closing
56
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
3 Open tailgate
4 Press and hold: panic mode
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture
Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 71,
the following access points are unlocked:
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.
In addition, the following functions are exe‐
cuted:
▷ The settings saved in the driver profile, re‐
fer to page 69, are applied.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off. Switching
the interior lights on and off manually, refer
to page 138.
▷ The welcome light, door handle lighting,
and Welcome Light Carpet are switched
on. These functions must be activated in
the Settings, refer to page 135.
Press the remote control button again to
switch on Welcome Light Carpet for the al‐
ready unlocked vehicle.
▷ The rear sliding visor is moved into the po‐
sition, where it was prior to locking.
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft pro‐
tection is switched off.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 72, is
switched off.
After opening the driver's door, the vehicle is
ready for operation, refer to page 20.
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
ent brightness.
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the remote
control is pressed.
Locking
1. Close the driver's door.
2.
Press button on the remote control.
▷ All doors and the tailgate are locked.
▷ The rear sliding visor is closed.
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft pro‐
tection is switched on. It prevents the
doors from being unlocked using the lock
buttons or the door opener.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 72, is
switched on.
If the vehicle horn honks twice when you lock
the vehicle, this means that the drive-ready
state is still switched on. In this case, the drive-
ready state must be switched off by means of
the Start/Stop button.
Switching on the interior and exterior
lights
Press button on the remote control with
the vehicle locked.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off. Switching
the interior lights on and off manually, refer
to page 138.
▷ Door handle lighting and Welcome Light
Carpet are switched on if these functions
were activated. Settings, refer to
page 135.
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
ent brightness.
If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐
onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐
tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-
Seite 57
Opening and closing Controls
57
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
theft warning system, refer to page 74, are
turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐
fore pressing the button again.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the features and the country
version, it is also possible to have the doors
unlocked. Adjusting the settings, refer to
page 71.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Opening
Press and hold button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second.
The tailgate opens, regardless of whether the
vehicle was previously locked or unlocked.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching on the headlight courtesy
delay feature
Press button on the remote control.
Set the duration, refer to page 135.
Replacing the battery
1. Remove the integrated key from the re‐
mote control, refer to page 63.
2. Place the integrated key underneath the
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and
lift the cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2.
3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow
using a pointed object and lift it out.
4. Insert a battery of type CR 2032 with the
positive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Seite 58
Controls Opening and closing
58
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
New remote controls
New remote controls are available from a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Blocking remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 58.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection by
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity of the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of a mobile device, e.g.,
charging of a mobile phone.
▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of
the wireless charging tray.
Place the remote control down at a differ‐
ent location.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the integrated key, refer to page 63.
Switching the drive-ready state on via
emergency detection of the remote
control
1. Hold the remote control with its back
against the marked area on the steering
column.
2. Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
onds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and
repeat the procedure.
BMW display key
General information
The BMW display key is supplied with a me‐
chanical key. If the display key is used, the me‐
chanical key should be carried with you, e.g., in
the wallet.
The display key supports all functions of the
standard remote control.
In addition, the following functions are also
available:
▷ Display status of doors and windows.
▷ Display status of the anti-theft warning
system.
▷ With parked-vehicle heating: operate
parked-vehicle heating.
Without parked-vehicle heating: operate
parked-vehicle ventilation.
▷ Call up range with available fuel.
▷ Display service information.
Seite 59
Opening and closing Controls
59
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ Remote Control Parking.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. The vehicle can then not be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
remote control with you so that the vehicle can
be opened from the outside.◀
WARNING
For some country-specific variants, un‐
locking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
1 Open tailgate
2 Unlocking
3 Panic mode
4 Locking
5 Park button
6 Display
7 Back
8 Switch the display on/off
9 Micro-USB charging socket
Reception range
The number of available remote control func‐
tions depends on the distance from the vehi‐
cle.
▷ When you are in close proximity to the ve‐
hicle, all functions are available.
▷ The status information can be called up in
the extended reception range.
With parked-vehicle heating: the parked-
vehicle heating can be operated.
Without parked-vehicle heating: the
parked-vehicle ventilation can be operated.
▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehi‐
cle, you can display the last transmitted
status information from the vehicle.
The symbol is shown on the display if one
of the buttons is pressed outside of the recep‐
tion range.
Seite 60
Controls Opening and closing
60
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Display
General information
The display is divided into the upper status
line, the information area, and the lower status
line.
Upper status line
The upper status line displays the following in‐
formation:
▷ Vehicle secured.
Vehicle not secured.
▷ Set time in the vehicle.
▷ Charge state of the battery in the re‐
mote control.
Information area
The information area can be used to access in‐
formation and perform additional functions.
If the information area contains more than one
page, then page indicators are shown beneath
the information.
The indicator for the current page has
been filled in.
Swipe to the right or left with a finger to
change between the pages.
If further information is available on a page, tap
the appropriate symbol.
To return to the original page: tap on the
symbol beneath the display.
Lower status line
The lower status line indicates whether or not
the remote control is within reception range,
refer to page 60.
▷ "Connected": Remote control is in the re‐
ception range.
▷ "Updated": Remote control is outside of
the reception range. It indicates when the
last data transfer from the vehicle took
place.
Switching on/off
The display will go out automatically after a
brief period to conserve battery power.
To hide the display manually:
Press button on the left side of the remote
control. Overview, refer to page 60.
To show the display:
1. Press button on the left side of the remote
control.
2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom
to top to unlock the screen lock.
To switch off the display to increase the usable
battery life:
1.
Press and hold the button on the left side
of the remote control for longer than 4 sec‐
onds.
2. "OK"
To switch the display on:
Press button on the left side of the remote
control.
Operating concept
Depending on the equipment, there are up to
five main menus that provide access to the
sub-menus.
Main menu Information/Function
"Security
information"
/
Door status.
Alarm system status.
After alarm triggering: date,
time, and reason for trigger‐
ing the alarm.
Window status.
Glass sunroof status.
Seite 61
Opening and closing Controls
61
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Main menu Information/Function
"Vehicle
information"
Maintenance indicators of
the Condition Based Service
CBS, refer to page 296.
Status of the roadside park‐
ing lamps.
"Mobility info" Range with available fuel.
Status during charging.
"Climate
setting"
With parked-vehicle heating:
operate parked-vehicle heat‐
ing, refer to page 219.
Without parked-vehicle heat‐
ing: operate parked-vehicle
ventilation, refer to
page 219.
"R/C parking" Remote Control Parking, re‐
fer to page 203.
Remote control battery
General information
If the charge state of the remote control bat‐
tery declines, the display is switched off auto‐
matically. The battery must be recharged so
that the display can be switched back on. The
operability of the standard buttons is retained
until the battery is completely discharged.
Charging
▷ Place the remote control into the recess of
the wireless charging tray underneath the
center armrest.
Make sure that the display is on the side of
the clamp and that the lock button points
upward.
▷ Connect the remote control via the micro-
USB charging socket to a USB port.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
BMW display key detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Charge the battery, refer to
page 62.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal
objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of a mobile device, e.g.,
charging of a mobile phone.
Do not transport the display key together with
metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the mechanical key.
Seite 62
Controls Opening and closing
62
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Switching on drive-ready state via
emergency detection of the BMW
display key
1. Hold the display key with its back against
the marked area on the steering column.
2. Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
onds.
If the display key is not detected, slightly
change the position of the display key and re‐
peat the procedure.
Resetting the BMW display key
If the charged display key cannot be switched
on anymore or if the display does not respond
to entries anymore, the display key can be re‐
set.
Press and hold the button on the left side of
the display key for at least 20 seconds, until
something appears on the display.
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without remote control using the integrated
key.
The integrated key also fits the glove compart‐
ment.
Safety information
WARNING
For some country-specific variants, un‐
locking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀
NOTE
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or key can be
damaged. There is a risk of property damage.
Remove the integrated key before pulling the
outside door handle.◀
Removing
Press the button, arrow 1, and remove the key,
arrow 2.
Seite 63
Opening and closing Controls
63
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Unlocking/locking via the door lock
1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with
one hand.
2. Guide one finger of the other hand from the
back under the cover, feel for the release
there, press outwards and remove the
cover.
3. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is
locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via
the door lock.
In order to stop this alarm, unlock vehicle with
the remote control, if needed, through emer‐
gency detection of the remote control, refer to
page 59.
Buttons for the central
locking system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Pressing the button locks the vehicle
if the front doors are closed.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft
when locking.
Unlocking
Pressing the button unlocks the vehi‐
cle.
Seite 64
Controls Opening and closing
64
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Unlocking and opening
▷ Press the central locking system
button to unlock the doors to‐
gether, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the
door to open the door. The other doors re‐
main locked.
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle
on the door to be opened; the first time un‐
locks the door, the second time opens it.
The other doors remain locked.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
vehicle's interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Opening tailgate.
▷ Opening/closing tailgate with no-touch ac‐
tivation.
Functional requirements
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Unlocking
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely,
arrow.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Locking
The driver's door must be closed.
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
closed vehicle door, arrow, with your finger for
approx. 1 second without grasping the door
handle.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Convenient closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Seite 65
Opening and closing Controls
65
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Closing
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
closed vehicle door, arrow, with your finger and
hold it there without grasping the door handle.
This corresponds to pressing and holding the
button on the remote control.
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors
fold in.
Open tailgate
General information
If you open the tailgate via Comfort Access,
locked doors will not be unlocked.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Opening
Press button on the exterior of the tailgate.
Opening and closing the tailgate with
no-touch activation
Concept
The tailgate can be opened and closed with
no-touch activation using the remote control
you are carrying. Two sensors detect a for‐
ward-directed foot motion in the center of the
area at the rear of the vehicle and the tailgate
opens and closes.
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
If the remote control is in the sensor range, the
tailgate may open or close inadvertently if you
unintentionally move your foot or if something
else moves in the detection range.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
cle.
If you open the tailgate with no-touch activa‐
tion, locked doors will not be unlocked.
Safety information
WARNING
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts
may be touched, e.g., hot exhaust system.
There is a risk of injury. When moving your
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do
not touch the vehicle.◀
Seite 66
Controls Opening and closing
66
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Performing the foot movement
1.
Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at
about an arm's length away from the rear
of the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direc‐
tion of travel and immediately pull it back.
With this movement, the leg must pass
through the ranges of both sensors.
Opening
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
The tailgate opens, regardless of whether it
was previously locked or unlocked.
Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐
tem flashes.
Closing
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
Before closing, the hazard warning system
flashes and an acoustic signal sounds.
You can interrupt the closing operation by
moving your foot again.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 58.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection by
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity of the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 63.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the features and the country
version, it is also possible to have the doors
unlocked. Adjusting the settings, refer to
page 71.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Seite 67
Opening and closing Controls
67
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Opening
From the outside
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
Press button on the exterior of the tailgate.
▷ Press and hold button on the re‐
mote control for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked. Opening with the remote
control, refer to page 58.
From the inside
Press button in the storage compart‐
ment of the driver's door.
Canceling the opening operation
The opening operation is interrupted:
▷ By pressing the button again.
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
Closing
Via the inside of the tailgate
Without Comfort Access:
Press button on the inside of the tailgate.
The tailgate closes automatically.
With Comfort Access:
▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the
tailgate.
▷ Press button, arrow 2.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
tailgate. The driver's door must be closed
for this purpose and the remote control
must be outside of the vehicle in the area
of the tailgate.
An acoustic signal sounds and the tailgate
closes.
Canceling the closing operation
The closing operation is interrupted:
▷ By pressing the button again.
▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky move‐
ment.
Locking separately
The tailgate can be locked separately using the
switch in the glove compartment. If the glove
Seite 68
Controls Opening and closing
68
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
compartment is locked, the tailgate cannot be
opened.
▷ Tailgate secured, arrow 1.
▷ Tailgate not secured, ar‐
row 2.
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. The
tailgate is secured and decoupled from the
central locking system.
This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked
using valet service. The remote control can be
handed out without the integrated key.
Emergency unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The tailgate unlocks.
Malfunction
In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper‐
ate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow
and smooth motion.
Automatic Soft Closing
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed while operat‐
ing the doors. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the doors is
clear during opening and closing.◀
To close the doors, push lightly.
Closing occurs automatically.
Driver profile
Concept
In the driver profiles, individual settings for
several drivers can be saved and called up
again at a later time.
General information
There are three driver profiles with which per‐
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐
mote control has one of these driver profiles
assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal driver profile will be
activated. All settings stored in the driver pro‐
file are automatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the
meantime by a person with a different remote
control.
Changes to the settings are automatically
saved in the driver profile currently activated.
If another driver profile is selected via iDrive,
the settings saved in it will be applied automat‐
ically. The new driver profile is assigned to the
remote control currently used.
There is an additional guest profile available
that is not assigned to any remote control. It
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle
without changing the personal driver profiles.
Active driver profile
After switching on the Control Display, the
name of the active driver profile is displayed.
Select driver profile, refer to page 70.
As soon as the engine is started or any key is
pressed, the last selected display is shown.
To exit the welcome screen via iDrive:
"OK"
Seite 69
Opening and closing Controls
69
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Settings
The settings for the following systems and
functions are saved in the active driver profile.
The scope of storable settings depends on
country and equipment.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Radio.
▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation.
▷ TV.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Panorama View.
▷ Head-up Display.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
▷ Seat position, exterior mirror position,
steering wheel position.
▷ Cruise control.
▷ Intelligent Safety.
▷ Night vision.
Profile management
Selecting a driver profile
Regardless of the remote control in use, a dif‐
ferent driver profile may be activated. This al‐
lows you to call up personal vehicle settings if
you did not unlock the vehicle with your own
key.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK"
▷ All settings stored in the called-up driver
profile are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to
the remote control being used at the time.
▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a
different remote control, this driver profile
will apply to both remote controls.
Guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that
are stored in none of the three personal driver
profiles.
This can be useful for drivers who are using
the vehicle temporarily and do not have their
own driver profile.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Drive off (guest)"
4. "OK"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Renaming a driver profile
A personal name can be assigned to the active
driver profile to avoid confusion between the
driver profiles.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be renamed.
3. Select driver profile.
4. "Change driver profile name"
5. Enter profile name.
6. Select the symbol.
Resetting a driver profile
The settings of the active driver profile are re‐
set to their factory settings.
Seite 70
Controls Opening and closing
70
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be reset.
3. Select driver profile.
4. "Reset driver profile"
Exporting driver profiles
Most settings of the active driver profile can be
exported.
This can be helpful for saving and retrieving
personal settings, e.g., before delivering the
vehicle to a workshop. The saved driver pro‐
files can be taken into another vehicle.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be exported.
3. Select driver profile.
4. "Export driver profile"
5.
▷ "USB device"
Select USB storage device, as needed,
refer to page 45.
▷ ConnectedDrive.
Importing driver profiles
The existing settings of the active driver profile
are overwritten with the settings of the im‐
ported driver profile.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be overwritten.
3. Select driver profile.
4. "Import driver profile"
5. Select the medium that was used to export
the driver profile.
▷ USB storage device: "USB device"
Select USB storage device as needed.
▷ ConnectedDrive.
6. Select driver profile.
Settings
General information
Depending on the equipment and country-
specific variant of your vehicle, different open‐
ing and closing settings are available.
These settings are stored for the driver profile,
refer to page 69, currently used.
Unlocking
Doors
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Driver's door"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate
Depending on optional features and country
version, this setting is not offered in some
cases.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
Seite 71
Opening and closing Controls
71
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Tailgate" or "Tailgate and
door(s)"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Tailgate"
The tailgate is opened.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
The tailgate is opened and the doors
are unlocked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.
▷ "Flash for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
▷ With alarm system:
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two honks of
the horn, locking by one.
Automatic locking
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select desired setting:
▷ "Lock automatically"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is
opened after unlocking.
▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Automatic unlocking
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Unlock at end of trip"
After drive-ready state is switched off by
pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked
vehicle is automatically unlocked.
Adjusting the last seat, mirror, and
steering wheel position
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "Last seat position automatic"
Unlocking the vehicle adjusts the last adjusted
positions for driver's seat, exterior mirrors, and
steering wheel.
Establishing idle state after opening
the front doors
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Turn off after door opening"
Opening the front doors establishes the
idle state, refer to page 19.
Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the interior.
Seite 72
Controls Opening and closing
72
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the vehicle.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
The alarm system signals these changes visu‐
ally and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the high beams.
Switching on and off
When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or with Comfort Ac‐
cess, the alarm system is switched on and off
at the same time.
Door lock with the alarm system
switched on
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via
the door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 74.
Tailgate with the alarm system
switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again provided the doors are
locked. The hazard warning system flashes
once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Indicator lamp on the interior mirror
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ Indicator lamp flashes for approx. 10 sec‐
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
When the still open access points are
closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor will be switched on.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until drive-ready state is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi‐
cle is towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Seite 73
Opening and closing Controls
73
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthor‐
ized action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
sensor can be switched off in such situations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐
trol, if needed, through emergency detec‐
tion of the remote control, refer to page 59.
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying
the remote control on your person, grasp
the driver side or front passenger side door
handle completely.
Power windows
Safety information
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Power windows
Safety switch
Seite 74
Controls Opening and closing
74
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Opening
▷ Press the button to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
See also: convenient opening via remote con‐
trol, refer to page 57.
Closing
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is
held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically. Pulling
again stops the motion.
Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to
page 65.
Pinch protection system
General information
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as
a window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Safety information
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is a
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
The pinch protection is limited and the
window reopens slightly if the closing force
exceeds a certain threshold.
2.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and
hold it there.
The window closes without jam protection.
Safety switch
General information
You can block certain functions in the rear of
the vehicle using the safety switch. This makes
sense, e.g., if children or animals are carried in
the rear.
The following functions can be locked using
the switch:
▷ Opening and closing of the rear windows
using the switches in the rear.
▷ Operation of the roller sunblind in the rear
window using the switches in the rear.
▷ Operation of the roller sunblinds in the side
windows using the switches in the rear.
▷ Adjustment of the power rear seats.
▷ Operation of the rear sliding visor using the
switches in the rear.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
safety function is switched off automatically.
Seite 75
Opening and closing Controls
75
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Overview
Safety switch
Switching on and off
Press button.
The LED lights up if the safety func‐
tion is switched on.
Roller sunblinds
General information
The safety switch, refer to page 75, in the driv‐
er's door can be used to prevent children, e.g.,
from operating the roller sunblinds using the
switches in the rear.
Rear window roller sunblind
Overview
Driver's door
Button for the roller sunblind.
Rear doors
Button for the roller sunblind.
Operation
Press the button to open the closed
roller sunblind or to close the open
roller sunblind.
If the button is pressed again during the move‐
ment, the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo‐
site direction.
Hold the button down to operate the roller sun‐
blinds on the rear window and on the side win‐
dows at the same time.
Roller sunblinds for side windows
Overview
Buttons for the roller sunblinds.
Operation
Press the button to open the closed
roller sunblind or to close the open
roller sunblind.
Seite 76
Controls Opening and closing
76
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
If the button is pressed again during the move‐
ment, the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo‐
site direction.
System limits
If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐
blinds after having activated them consecu‐
tively a number of times, the system is blocked
for a limited time to prevent overheating. Let
the system cool.
The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low
interior temperatures.
BMW Touch Command
The roller sunblinds can also be operated us‐
ing BMW Touch Command.
Glass sunroof
General information
The glass sunroof and the front sliding visor
can be operated together or separately using
the same switch. The rear sliding visor is oper‐
ated using separate buttons.
The glass sunroof is operational when standby
state is switched on.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
1 Open/close the glass sunroof/sliding visor.
With panoramic glass sunroof: open/close
glass sunroof/front sliding visor.
2 With panoramic glass sunroof: close rear
sliding visor.
3 With panoramic glass sunroof: open rear
sliding visor.
Lifting/closing glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
▷ The closed glass sunroof is
tilted and the sliding visor
opens slightly.
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in its tilted
position. The sliding visor
does not move.
▷ The tilted glass sunroof is closed.
Seite 77
Opening and closing Controls
77
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
front sliding visor separately
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
The sliding visor opens, as
long as the switch is held
down. If the sliding visor is
already fully open, the glass
sunroof opens.
The glass sunroof closes as
long as the switch is held
down. If the glass sunroof is
already closed or in the tilted
position, the sliding visor
closes.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
The sliding visor opens automatically. If the
sliding visor is already fully open, the glass
sunroof opens automatically.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If
the glass sunroof is already closed or in the
tilted position, the sliding visor closes au‐
tomatically.
Pressing the switch upward stops the mo‐
tion.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
front sliding visor together
Briefly press the switch twice in
succession in the desired direc‐
tion past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor move together. Pressing the
switch upward stops the motion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
fer to page 57.
Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to
page 65.
Comfort position
If the glass sunroof is not completely opened
automatically, the comfort position has been
attained. In this position the wind noises in the
interior are the least.
If desired, continue the movement by pressing
the switch.
Opening/closing the rear sliding visor
On the roofliner control panel
Press button to open the rear sliding
visor.
Press button again to stop the movement.
Press button to close the sliding visor.
Press button again to stop the move‐
ment.
On the control panel in the rear doors
The rear sliding visor cannot be used via the
buttons in the rear if the safety function, refer
to page 75, is switched on.
Press the button to open the closed
sliding visor or to close the open slid‐
ing visor.
Press button again to stop the movement.
When the button is pressed again, the sliding
visor will move in the opposite direction.
BMW Touch Command
The front and rear sliding visor can also be op‐
erated using BMW Touch Command.
Actions during unlocking/locking
If the vehicle is locked from the outside, the
rear sliding visor is automatically closed.
During unlocking, the sliding visor is automati‐
cally moved into the position, where it was
prior to locking.
Seite 78
Controls Opening and closing
78
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Pinch protection system
General information
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from
the tilted position during closing.
The glass sunroof reopens slightly.
Closing from the open position
without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1.
Press the switch forward beyond the re‐
sistance point and hold.
The pinch protection is limited and the
glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain threshold.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the glass
sunroof closes without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Closing from the raised position
without pinch protection
If there is an external danger,
push the switch forward past the
resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐
tion.
Initializing after a power interruption
General information
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent.
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During the initialization, the glass sunroof
closes without jam protection.
Initializing the system
Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is com‐
plete:
Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is completed
when the glass sunroof and sliding visor are
completely closed.
Seite 79
Opening and closing Controls
79
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs
of the occupants can make a vital contribution
to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The correct seating position is important in the
event of an accident. Additionally, observe the
following chapters for safe driving:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 85.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 86.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 141.
Front seats
General information
The seat adjustment for the driver's seat is
stored for the driver profile currently used.
When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote
control, the position is automatically retrieved
if the function, refer to page 72, is activated for
this purpose.
Safety information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the protective effect of the safety belt
cannot be ensured anymore. There is a risk of
sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Ad‐
just the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust
the backrest so that it is in the most upright
position as possible and do not adjust again
while driving.◀
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Overview
1 Thigh support
2 Forward/back, height, tilt
3 Shoulder support
4 Backrest width
5 Lumbar support
6 Backrest, head restraint
Seite 80
Controls Settings
80
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Forward/backward
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch up or down.
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Push switch forward or backward.
Lumbar support
Concept
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
Settings
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Seite 81
Settings Controls
81
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Backrest width
General information
You can change the width of the backrest us‐
ing the side wings to adjust the lateral support.
Settings
Press the button on the respec‐
tive side.
Shoulder support
Concept
The shoulder support also supports the back
in the shoulder area. A correct setting leads to
a relaxed seating position and reduces strain
on the shoulder muscles.
Settings
Press the button on the respective side.
Gentleman function
Concept
The front passenger seat can be adjusted with
the switches of the driver's seat, e.g., to in‐
crease the legroom in the rear.
Overview
Gentleman function
Switching on
1. Press button. The LED lights up.
2. Adjust the front passenger seat at the driv‐
er's seat.
If needed, store the memory position, refer
to page 92, for the front passenger seat.
Switching off
Press button and hold until LED goes
out.
The function deactivates itself automatically
after some time.
BMW Touch Command
The front passenger seat can also be operated
using BMW Touch Command.
Rear seats
General information
The seat adjustment switches are located on
the center armrest of the rear seats.
If the safety switch, refer to page 75, is
pressed, the seats cannot be adjusted.
Seite 82
Controls Settings
82
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when folding
down the center armrest in the rear. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the center armrest is clear during fold‐
ing down.◀
Overview
1 Resetting to standard position
2 Head restraint, shoulder support
3 Lumbar support
4 Folding the footrest out/in
5 Forward/backward, tilt
6 Backrest
7 Adjust front passenger seat
Forward/backward
Push switch forward or backward.
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Move switch forward or backward.
Lumbar support
Concept
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
Settings
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Seite 83
Settings Controls
83
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Shoulder support
Concept
The shoulder support also supports the back
in the shoulder area. A correct setting leads to
a relaxed seating position and reduces strain
on the shoulder muscles.
Settings
Push switch forward or backward.
Folding the footrest out/in
General information
The distance between the front passenger
seat and the rear seat must be sufficiently
large to unfold the footrest on the backrest of
the front passenger seat.
Settings
Press the upper or lower section
of the button.
Resetting to standard position
Press button to reset to standard po‐
sition.
The process is canceled if the button is
pressed again.
Adjusting the front passenger seat
from the rear
Concept
The front passenger seat can be operated
from the rear, e.g., to increase the legroom in
the rear.
General information
With the button for adjusting the shoulder sup‐
port, refer to page 84, it is possible to set the
angle of the screen in the rear on the passen‐
ger side.
Settings
1. Press button.
2. Adjust the passenger seat, e.g., forward/
back.
Seite 84
Controls Settings
84
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
3.
Press the button to deactivate the
function.
The function deactivates itself automatically
after some time.
BMW Touch Command
The rear seats can also be operated via BMW
Touch Command.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts
The vehicle is fitted with four or five safety
belts to ensure occupant safety. However, they
can only offer protection when adjusted cor‐
rectly.
The two outer safety belt buckles, integrated
into the rear seat, are for passengers sitting on
the left and right.
The center safety belt buckle of the rear seat is
solely intended for the person sitting in the
middle.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐
though airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
Slowly guide the safety belt out of the holder
when fastening it.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
If the safety belt is used by more than
one person, the protective effect of the safety
belt cannot be ensured anymore. There is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow
more than one person to wear a single safety
belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an
occupant's lap, but must be transported and
respectively secured in designated child re‐
straint systems.◀
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
safety belt can cause additional injuries, e.g., in
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are
wearing safety belts correctly.◀
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and as tight
to your body as possible over your lap and
shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips
over your lap. The safety belt may not
press on your stomach.
▷ Do not wear the safety belt on your throat,
rub it on sharp edges, guide it or jam it in
across hard or fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐
ward around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt
The safety belt buckle must engage audibly.
When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's
and passenger's belt straps are automatically
tightened once after driving away.
Seite 85
Settings Controls
85
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Unbuckling the safety belt
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Rear belt guide
When fastening the safety belts on the rear
seats, make sure that the belt guide loop is
closed.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and front passenger seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated
if objects are placed on the front passenger
seat.
Safety mode
In critical situations, e.g., during an emergency
stop, the front safety belts tighten automati‐
cally.
If the situation passes without an accident oc‐
curring, the belt tension relaxes.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety
belt using the red button in the buckle. Fasten
the safety belt before continuing on your trip.
Damage to safety belts
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ Safety belts are damaged, soiled or
changed in any other way.
▷ Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily
soiled.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them
clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Front head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at eye level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
Seite 86
Controls Settings
86
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
neck area. There is a risk of injury. Install head
restraints on occupied seats prior to driving
and make sure that the center of the head re‐
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows,
while driving.◀
Active head restraint
In the event of a rear-end collision with a cer‐
tain severity, the active head restraint automat‐
ically reduces the distance from the head.
Have the active head restraint checked and if
necessary replaced in the case of damage or if
it was exposed to an accident.
Adjusting the height
Push switch up or down.
Distance to back of head: manual head
restraints
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
front.
▷ Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
Distance to back of head: electrical
head restraints
The head restraint is automatically reposi‐
tioned when the shoulder support is adjusted.
Seite 87
Settings Controls
87
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Adjusting the side extensions
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint
forward for increased lateral support in the
resting position.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at eye level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury. Install head
restraints on occupied seats prior to driving
and make sure that the center of the head re‐
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows,
while driving.◀
Adjusting the center head restraint
To improve the view to the rear, the center
head restraint can be folded to the rear.
Only push the head restraint down if no one
will be sitting in the center seat.
▷ To the rear: press button, arrow 1, and fold
the head restraint backward.
▷ To the front: fold head restraint forward un‐
til the head restraint engages.
Seite 88
Controls Settings
88
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Adjusting the height: manual head
restraints
The height of the outer head restraints can be
adjusted.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
head restraint down.
Adjusting the height: electrical head
restraints
General information
The height adjustment of the head restraint is
deactivated when the safety switch for the rear
windows, refer to page 75, has been pressed.
Switches in the vehicle
Push the switch in the center armrest up or
down.
Adjusting the side extensions
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint
forward for increased lateral support in the
resting position.
Pillows for head restraints in the rear
Only use the pillow when the vehicle is
switched off.
1.
Pull the upper tab through the loop on the
top of the head restraint.
2. Close both pushbuttons.
Seite 89
Settings Controls
89
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
3. The head restraint folds into the topmost
position.
4. Close the pushbutton on the lower tab and
the pushbutton on the bottom of the head
restraint.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐
ror setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used. When the vehicle is unlocked via
the remote control, the position is automati‐
cally retrieved if this function is active.
Safety information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
behind could be incorrectly estimated, e.g.,
while changing lanes. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic be‐
hind by looking over your shoulder.◀
Overview
1 Settings 90
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out 90
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
Press button.
The mirror movement follows the button
movement.
Saving positions
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 92.
Adjusting manually
In case of electrical malfunction press edges of
mirror.
Folding in and out
NOTE
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There
is a risk of property damage. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
Press button.
Seite 90
Controls Settings
90
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Possible at speeds up to approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Fold the mirrors in and out is advantageous in
the following situations:
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells are used to con‐
trol the interior mirror, refer to page 91.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
mirror
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.
Activating
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's side mirror
position.
Interior mirror, automatic dimming
feature
Overview
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Rear vanity mirror
Folding down
Press the vanity mirror.
The vanity mirror folds down. The angle can be
adjusted by hand.
Folding up
Press the mirror up.
Seite 91
Settings Controls
91
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Electric steering wheel adjustment
Settings
Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating position
by pressing the switch.
Storing the position
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 92.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
Heated steering wheel
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED illuminates with the heated
steering wheel switched on.
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 min af‐
ter an intermediate stop, the heated steering
wheel activates again automatically.
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory
Concept
Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror and
steering wheel positions can be stored per
driver profile, refer to page 69, and called up.
General information
Settings for the backrest width and lumbar
support are not stored in memory.
Safety information
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of an accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is station‐
ary.◀
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Seite 92
Controls Settings
92
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Overview
Front
The memory buttons are located on the front
doors.
Rear
The memory buttons are located on the rear
doors.
Storing
1.
Set the desired position.
2.
Press button. The writing on the
button lights up.
3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. A signal sounds.
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automatically.
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
While driving, the seat position adjustment on
the driver's side is interrupted after a short
time.
BMW Touch Command
The memory function can also be operated on
the front passenger seat and in the rear via
BMW Touch Command.
Massage function
Concept
Depending on the program, the massage func‐
tion ensures relaxed muscles and better blood
circulation and can avoid fatigue.
General information
Eight different massage programs can be se‐
lected:
▷ Pelvis activation.
▷ Upper body activation.
▷ Full body activation.
▷ Back massage.
▷ Shoulder massage.
▷ Lumbar massage.
▷ Upper body training.
▷ Full body training.
Overview
Front
Seite 93
Settings Controls
93
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Massage function
Rear
Massage function
Switching on
Massage function is started.
Press button once for each massage
level.
The highest level is active when three LEDs
are lit.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Adjusting the massage program
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
5. "Seat massage"
6. Select the desired setting.
BMW Touch Command
Operation of the massage function is also pos‐
sible via BMW Touch Command.
Executive Lounge Seating
Concept
The Executive Lounge Seating function offers
maximum legroom and increased traveling
comfort to the rear passenger on the passeng‐
er's side.
General information
The following settings are applied automati‐
cally on system activation:
▷ The front passenger's seat moves forward
and adjusts the height, if necessary.
▷ Backrest and head restraint of the front
passenger seat are inclined forward.
▷ The tilt of the screen in the rear is adjusted
to the backrest incline of the passenger's
seat.
▷ The head restraint on the backrest of the
front passenger seat folds out.
▷ The backrest of the rear seat inclines to the
rear.
The adjusted end position can be manually ad‐
justed, refer to page 82, and if required stored
using the memory function, refer to page 92.
Safety information
WARNING
If Executive Lounge Seating is activated,
the view on the exterior mirror on the front pas‐
senger side can be obstructed. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust the front passenger seat
such that the view on the exterior mirror is not
obstructed.◀
Seite 94
Controls Settings
94
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Overview
Executive Lounge Seating
Switching on
Press button.
Resetting to standard position
Press button to reset to standard po‐
sition.
The process is canceled if the button is
pressed again.
Vitality program
Concept
Different muscles can be trained using the vi‐
tality program in the rear. Active movements
help in preventing signs of fatigue.
General information
A calibration sequence is performed after each
start of the vitality program. Here, the intensity
of the exercises is set individually.
Videos on the respective screens in the rear
show which motions should be executed. A
display provides information about the remain‐
ing duration of each exercise.
Color bars indicate, whether an exercise is exe‐
cuted correctly:
▷ Green: exercise was performed correctly.
▷ Gray: the pressure was too weak.
▷ Red: the pressure was too strong.
The goal of the exercises is to keep the bar
display in the green area as long as possible.
Every exercise is evaluated by awarding stars.
Switching on
On the screens in the rear:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. "BMW Vitality Program"
Switching off
On the screens in the rear:
1.
Press left arrow button on the remote con‐
trol in the rear.
2. "Stop"
BMW Touch Command
The vitality program can also be operated us‐
ing BMW Touch Command.
Seat and armrest heating
General information
The system heats seats and armrests as
needed. Seat heating can also be used without
armrest heating.
Seite 95
Settings Controls
95
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Overview
Front
Seat and armrest heating
Rear
Seat and armrest heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
Highest level if three bars are shown on the cli‐
mate control display.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes after a stop, seat and armrest heating is
activated automatically with the temperature
selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 254, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press button and hold until bar display
on the climate control display goes
out.
Temperature distribution
The heating action in the seat cushion and
backrest can be distributed in different ways.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Seat and armrest heating"
5. Select desired seat.
6. Press the controller and turn to set the
temperature distribution.
Switching armrest heating on/off
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Seat and armrest heating"
5. Select desired seat.
6. "Heat armrests together with seat"
Active seat ventilation
Concept
The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are
cooled by means of integrated fans.
The ventilation cools the seat, e.g., if the vehi‐
cle interior is overheated or for continuous
cooling at high temperatures.
Seite 96
Controls Settings
96
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Overview
Front
Active seat ventilation
Rear
Active seat ventilation
Switching on
Press button once for each ventilation
level.
Highest level if three bars are shown on the cli‐
mate control display.
After a short time, the system automatically
moves down one level in order to prevent ex‐
cessive cooling.
Switching off
Press button and hold until bar display
on the climate control display goes
out.
Seite 97
Settings Controls
97
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
The right place for children
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Children should always be in the rear
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Only transport children younger than 13 years
of age or shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm in the rear in
suitable child restraint systems provided in ac‐
cordance with the age, weight and size of the
child. Children 13 years of age or older must
wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child
restraint system can no longer be used due to
their age, weight and size.
Safety information
WARNING
Children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm cannot
correctly fasten the safety belt without suitable
additional restraint systems. The protective ef‐
fect of the safety belts can be limited or lost
when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An
incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause ad‐
ditional injuries, e.g., in the event of an acci‐
dent or during braking and evasive maneuvers.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Se‐
cure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using
suitable restraint systems.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
Before using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
knee, and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of
front-seat passenger airbags, refer to
page 143.
Seite 98
Controls Transporting children safely
98
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Installing child restraint
systems
General information
Pay attention to the information, operating and
safety information of the child restraint system
manufacturer when selecting, installing and
using child restraint systems.
Safety information
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 143.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
ble and bring it possibly up to medium height
to obtain the best possible position for the belt
and to offer optimal protection in the event of
an accident.
If the upper anchor of the safety belt is located
in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move
the front passenger seat carefully forward until
the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Child seat security
The safety belts in the rear and the front pas‐
senger safety belt can be permanently locked
to fasten child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1.
Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
Seite 99
Transporting children safely Controls
99
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
dren.
Pay attention to the information, operating and
safety information of the child restraint system
manufacturer when selecting, installing and
using LATCH child restraint fixing systems.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
General information
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tems are not correctly engaged, the protective
effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tem can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐
chors are securely engaged and that the
LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐
curely against the backrest.◀
Position
The corresponding symbol shows the
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower anchors are
marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym‐
bols. It is not recommended to use the
inner lower anchors of standard outer
LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint
system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle
seat belt instead for the middle seat.
Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
Without comfort rear seats: assembly
of LATCH child restraint fixing
systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
With comfort rear seats: assembly of
LATCH child restraint fixing systems
1.
Before mounting, adjust the seats to their
basic position, refer to page 84.
2. For better accessibility, tilt the backrest
back slightly.
3. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
4. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
5. After mounting, move the backrest back up
slightly so that the child restraint system
rests lightly against the backrest.
Child restraint system with a tether
strap
Mounting points
The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper top tether are
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
Seite 100
Controls Transporting children safely
100
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Safety information
NOTE
The mounting points for the upper re‐
taining straps of child restraint systems are
only provided for these retaining straps. When
other objects are mounted, the anchors can be
damaged. There is a risk of property damage.
Only mount child restraint systems to the up‐
per retaining straps.◀
Routing the retaining strap
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1.
Remove the mounting point cover.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
Guide it over the head restraint of the mid‐
dle seat.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the anchor.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Locking the doors and
windows in the rear
General information
In certain situations, it may be useful to secure
the rear doors and windows so that they can‐
not be opened from the inside, e.g. when
transporting children.
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press button on the driver's door.
This locks various functions so that they can‐
not be operated from the rear: safety switch,
refer to page 75.
Seite 101
Transporting children safely Controls
101
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Start/Stop button
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches drive-ready state on or
off, refer to page 19.
Drive-ready state is switched on
when you depress the brake
pedal while pressing the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
drive-ready state back off and standby state,
refer to page 19, is switched back on.
Drive-ready state
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
NOTE
In the case of repeated starting attempts
or repeated starting in quick succession, the
fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
The catalytic converter can overheat. There is
a risk of property damage. Avoid repeated
starting in quick succession.◀
Switching on drive-ready state
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
gine starts.
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the
instrument cluster light up for a varied length
of time.
Display
READY is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Seite 102
Controls Driving
102
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Switching off drive-ready state
Steptronic transmission
1. Engage selector lever position P with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
3. Set the parking brake.
Before driving into a vehicle wash
So that the vehicle can roll into a vehicle wash,
observe instructions for going into an auto‐
matic vehicle wash, refer to page 307.
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.
The engine starts again automatically for driv‐
ing off.
General information
After every engine start via the Start/Stop but‐
ton, the Auto Start/Stop function is activated or
deactivated, according to the last setting, refer
to page 104. If the Auto Start/Stop function is
active, it is available as soon as a speed of ap‐
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h is exceeded.
Depending on the selected driving mode, refer
to page 116, the system is automatically acti‐
vated or deactivated.
Engine stop
Functional requirements
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the
vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held
by Automatic Hold.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
General information
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The display in the tachometer
indicates that the Auto Start/
Stop function is ready for an Au‐
tomatic engine start.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
System limits
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.
▷ Brake not engaged strongly enough.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The vehicle's interior has not yet been
heated or cooled to the required level.
▷ If window condensation is imminent.
▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem‐
perature.
▷ Engine cooling is required.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
Seite 103
Driving Controls
103
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Selector lever position in N or R.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
Functional requirements
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: press
the accelerator pedal.
General information
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
System limits
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the vehicle's interior
when the cooling function is switched on.
▷ Excessive cooling of the vehicle's interior
when the heating is switched on.
▷ If window condensation is imminent.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Change from selector lever position D to N
or R.
▷ Change from selector lever position P to N,
D, or R.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Start of an oil level measurement.
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Concept
The engine is not automatically switched off.
The engine is started during an automatic en‐
gine stop.
Using the button
Press button.
Via selector lever position or Driving
Dynamics Control
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deacti‐
vated in selector lever position M/S or in
SPORT driving mode of the Driving Dynamics
Control.
Display
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is
activated.
Seite 104
Controls Driving
104
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e.g., when
leaving it.
1. Press the Start/Stop button.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged
automatically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Automatic deactivation
General information
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐
sons, e.g., if no driver is detected.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐
cle from rolling when it is parked.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Parking brake
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
Seite 105
Driving Controls
105
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster illuminates red. The parking
brake is set.
While driving
To use as emergency brake while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the switch is being pulled.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,
and the brake lights illuminate.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap‐
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.
Releasing
With drive-ready state switched on:
Press the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is
set.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic release
The parking brake is released automatically
when you drive away.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
Automatic Hold
Concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving off.
General information
Under the following conditions, the parking
brake is automatically engaged:
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehi‐
cle is stationary.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand‐
still using the parking brake.
Display
The indicator lamp changes from green
to red.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
Seite 106
Controls Driving
106
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
NOTE
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic
Hold engages the parking brake. It prevents
the vehicle from rolling in a vehicle wash.
There is a risk of property damage. Deactivate
Automatic Hold prior to entering the vehicle
wash.◀
Overview
Automatic Hold
Establishing function readiness from
Automatic Hold
With drive-ready state switched on:
Press button.
The LED lights up.
The indicator lamp lights up green.
Automatic Hold is functional.
After every new vehicle start, the last
selected setting is active.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
Function readiness is established and the driv‐
er's door is closed.
After stepping on the brake pedal, e.g., when
stopping at a traffic light, the vehicle is auto‐
matically secured against rolling.
The indicator lamp lights up green.
Driving away
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off.
The brake is released automatically.
The indicator lamp goes out.
Activating the parking brake
automatically
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle
is exited.
The indicator lamp changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set automatically, if
the drive-ready state is switched off, while the
vehicle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is
deactivated.
Switching function readiness off
Press button.
The LED goes out.
The indicator lamp goes out.
Automatic Hold is switched off.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press additionally on the brake pedal, when
switching off.
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake:
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, e.g.,
with a wheel chock, after existing the vehicle.
Seite 107
Driving Controls
107
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
After a power failure
To reestablish parking brake functionality after
a power failure:
1. Turn on standby state.
2.
Pull the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is
set and then push.
This process may take a few seconds. Any
sounds associated with this are normal.
The indicator lamp is no longer illumi‐
nated as soon as the parking brake is
ready for operation again.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights
on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
The lever returns into its starting position after
actuation.
To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to
the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Slightly tap the lever up or down.
The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Seite 108
Controls Driving
108
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Safety information
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of property damage. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Switching on
Tap the lever up or press it beyond the resist‐
ance point.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
beyond the resistance point.
Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐
hicle comes to standstill.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
down twice.
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed:
press down once.
▷ Single wipe: press down once.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Intermittent operation or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di‐
rectly in front of the interior mirror. Without the
rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper opera‐
tion is preset.
Safety information
NOTE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of property damage.
Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
Activating/deactivating
Press button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started.
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor:
LED in wiper lever lights up.
Seite 109
Driving Controls
109
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera‐
tion is deactivated.
During trip interruption with the rain sensor
switched on: if the trip is resumed within ap‐
prox. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automati‐
cally activated again.
Setting the interval time or sensitivity
of the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Windshield and headlight
washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use
the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀
NOTE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
the washer system when the washer fluid res‐
ervoir is empty.◀
Cleaning
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐
vated.
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while standby state is switched
on.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The wipers can be folded away from the wind‐
shield in the fold-away position.
General information
Important, e.g., when changing the wiper
blades or when folding out under frosty condi‐
tions.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
Seite 110
Controls Driving
110
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Folding away the wipers
1. Turn on standby state.
2. With frosty conditions, make sure that the
blades are not frozen to the windshield.
3. Press and hold the wiper level down, until
the wipers stop in a close to vertical posi‐
tion.
4. Lift the wiper all the way off of the wind‐
shield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1.
Switch on drive-ready state and press and
hold the wiper lever down again.
2. Wipers return to their resting position and
are ready again for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir.
Use a mixture of tap water, windshield washer
concentrate, and possibly antifreeze for the
windshield washer system.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Observe the
instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐
trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.◀
NOTE
Silicon-containing additives in the
washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on
the windows can lead to damage to the wash‐
ing system. There is a risk of property damage.
Do not add silicon-containing additives to the
washer fluid.◀
NOTE
Mixing different windshield washer con‐
centrates or antifreeze agents can damage the
washing system. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not mix different windshield
Seite 111
Driving Controls
111
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
washer concentrates or antifreeze agents. Ob‐
serve the information and mixing ratios pro‐
vided on the containers.◀
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
gine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐
centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead
to incorrect readings at temperatures below
+ 5 ℉/- 15 ℃.
Steptronic transmission
Concept
The Steptronic transmission combines the
functions of an automatic transmission with
the possibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
automatically.
Engage selector lever position D only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Reverse R
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Neutral N
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without en‐
gine power in selector lever position N, for in‐
stance in vehicle washes, refer to page 307.
Engage selector lever position N only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Parking position P
Selector level position, for instance for parking
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive
wheels in selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally in the following situations:
▷ After drive-ready state is switched off and
selector lever position R or D is engaged.
▷ If, with the vehicle stationary and the selec‐
tor lever in position D or R, the driver's
safety belt unbuckled, the driver's door is
opened, and the brake pedal is not de‐
pressed.
Seite 112
Controls Driving
112
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Engaging selector lever positions
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Functional requirements
Only when the engine is running and the brake
pedal is depressed is it possible to change
from selector lever position P to another selec‐
tor lever position.
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R
A selector lever lock prevents the following
faulty operation:
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever
position R.
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever
position P into another selector lever posi‐
tion.
1. Press and hold the button to release the
selector lever lock.
2. With the driver's safety belt fastened, tap
the selector lever in the desired direction,
beyond a resistance point, if needed. The
selector lever automatically returns to the
center position when released.
Engaging selector lever position P
Press button P.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re‐
sistance point at the full throttle position.
Sport program M/S
Concept
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier driv‐
ing style. The transmission, e.g., shifts up later
and the shifting times are shorter.
Seite 113
Driving Controls
113
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Activating the sport program
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐
tor lever position D.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
Ending the Sport program
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Manual mode M/S
Concept
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual
mode.
Activating manual mode
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐
tor lever position D, arrow 1. Next, push the se‐
lector lever forward or pull it backward, ar‐
row 2.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
The transmission continues shifting automati‐
cally in certain situations, e.g., when speed lim‐
its are reached.
Steptronic Sport transmission:
prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
manual mode
If driving mode SPORT, refer to page 117, is
selected, the Steptronic Sport transmission
does not automatically upshift in M/S manual
mode once the maximum speed is reached.
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐
down.
Ending the manual mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
General information
Shifting
The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and
road speeds.
Switching into manual mode
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift
paddle switches into manual mode perma‐
nently.
In selector lever position D, actuating a shift
paddle switches into manual mode tempora‐
rily.
Seite 114
Controls Driving
114
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Switching into automatic mode
In selector lever position D, after conservative
driving for a certain amount of time in manual
mode or if there has been no acceleration or
shifting of the shift paddles within a certain
amount of time, the transmission switches
back to automatic mode.
It is possible to switch into the automatic mode
as follows:
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift
paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
Steptronic Sport transmission
With the respective transmission version, the
lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐
taneously operating the kickdown and the left
shift paddles. This is not possible, when
switching briefly via the shift paddles from se‐
lector lever position D into manual mode.
Shifting with the shift paddles
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ The lowest possible gear can be selected
by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is
displayed, for example: P.
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the
engine.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll‐
ing away.
Engaging selector lever position N
1.
Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter
must audibly start. Hold the Start/Stop but‐
ton pressed.
3. Use your free hand and press the button
on the selector lever, see arrow 1, and
press and hold the selector lever into se‐
lector lever position N, see arrow N, until
selector lever position N is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
A Check Control message is displayed.
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector
lever.
Seite 115
Driving Controls
115
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter
stops.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
For additional information, see chapter Tow-
starting and towing.
Launch Control
Concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐
rounding conditions.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 248, period.
Do not steer the steering wheel when driving
off with Launch Control.
Functional requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
Start with launch control
1.
Switch on drive-ready state.
2.
Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF
lights up.
3. Engage selector lever position S.
4. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full
throttle position, kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Repeated use during a trip
After Launch Control was used, the transmis‐
sion must cool down for approx. 5 minutes, be‐
fore Launch Control can be used again.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
conditions, when used again.
After using Launch Control
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control again as soon as possi‐
ble.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
Driving Dynamics Control
Concept
The Driving Dynamics Control influences the
driving dynamics properties of the vehicle. The
vehicle can be adjusted depending on the sit‐
uation using various driving modes.
General information
The following systems are affected:
▷ Engine characteristics.
▷ Steptronic transmission.
▷ Dynamic Damping Control.
▷ Air suspension.
▷ Active roll stabilization.
▷ Integral Active Steering.
▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
▷ Cruise control.
▷ Backrest width for comfort seats.
Seite 116
Controls Driving
116
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
When drive-ready state is switched on, the
COMFORT driving mode is selected automati‐
cally.
Overview
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selected driving mode is
displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Driving modes
Button Driving
mode
Configuration
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
COMFORT PLUS
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
ADAPTIVE
Driving modes in detail
COMFORT
Concept
Balanced tuning between dynamic and con‐
sumption-optimized driving.
Switching on
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
COMFORT PLUS
Concept
Particularly comfortable tuning for optimum
traveling comfort.
Switching on
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT PLUS is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
SPORT
Concept
Dynamic tuning for higher agility.
Switching on
Press button. SPORT is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
Concept
Individual settings can be adjusted in the
SPORT INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
Configuration
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Driving Experience Control"
4. "Configure SPORT INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
"Reset to SPORT STANDARD".
Seite 117
Driving Controls
117
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
ECO PRO
Concept
Consumption-optimized tuning.
Switching on
Press button. ECO PRO is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
Concept
Individual settings can be adjusted in the ECO
PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
Configuration
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Driving Experience Control"
4. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".
ADAPTIVE
Concept
Comfort-oriented driving mode, whose tuning
is automatically adjusted to the driving situa‐
tion and driving style.
If the navigation system is active, upcoming
road sections are considered.
Switching on
Press button. ADAPTIVE is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
INDIVIDUAL configuration
General information
The individual configuration of the driving
mode is stored for the active driver profile. The
last set configuration is activated directly when
the driving mode is called up again.
Activating configuration of the driving
mode
Press button for the desired driving mode sev‐
eral times.
Seite 118
Controls Driving
118
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Instrument cluster
Concept
The instrument cluster is a variable display.
When you change to a different program via
Driving Dynamics Control, the display adapts
to the respective program.
General information
The display change can be deactivated via
iDrive.
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster
may differ from the way they are shown in this
Owner's Manual.
Overview
1 Fuel gauge 123
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
range 124
2 Speedometer
3 Time 124
External temperature 124
Driver assistance system displays
Service requirements 125
4 Tachometer 124
Selection lists 127
ECO PRO displays 254
Navigation display
5 Engine temperature 124
6 Transmission display 112
Status, Driving Dynamics Control 116
7 Messages, e.g., Check Control
Onboard computer 128
8 Driver assistance system displays
Speed Limit Info 126
Instrument cluster without enhanced fea‐
tures: range 124
9 Reset miles 129
Adjusting the view
Concept
In addition to the driving modes, the instru‐
ment cluster can be adjusted to three different
operating modes.
Settings
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
Seite 119
Displays Controls
119
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ "STANDARD": All displays on the in‐
strument cluster are active.
▷ "REDUCED" All displays on the instru‐
ment cluster are reduced to the essen‐
tial.
▷ "INDIVIDUAL": All displays on the in‐
strument cluster are active. Individual
displays can be individually configured.
Configuring INDIVIDUAL
▷ "Driving mode display": when the driving
mode is switched into ECO PRO or
SPORT, the instrument cluster automati‐
cally switches into the respective view.
▷ "Speed limit exceeded": if the speed rec‐
ognized by Speed Limit Info is exceeded,
the exceeded range is marked red in the
speedometer.
▷ Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
"Magnifier function": the current speed is
shown enlarged in the speedometer.
Check Control
Concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
SMS text messages in the instrument cluster
and in the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a
SMS text message may appear on the Control
Display.
Indicator/warning lights
Concept
Indicator/warning lights in the instrument clus‐
ter display the status of some functions in the
vehicle and indicate when a malfunction is
present in the monitored systems.
General information
The indicator and warning lights can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when
drive-ready state is switched on.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Indicator lamp flashes or is illuminated:
safety belt on the driver or passenger
side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐
minder can also be activated if objects are
placed on the front passenger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
For additional information, see Releas‐
ing the parking brake, refer to
page 106.
Seite 120
Controls Displays
120
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Brake system
Braking system impaired. Continue to
drive moderately.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Braking force boost may not be work‐
ing. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the lon‐
ger braking distance into account.
Have the system immediately checked
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces. The
vehicle is stabilized. Reduce speed and
adapt driving style to the driving circumstan‐
ces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has mal‐
functioned.
Have the system immediately checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
For additional information, see Dynamic Stabil‐
ity Control DSC, refer to page 169.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
Control is activated
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deac‐
tivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol is activated.
For additional information, see Dynamic Stabil‐
ity Control DSC, refer to page 169, and Dy‐
namic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 170.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
neuvers.
For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐
fer to page 281.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator lamp is illuminated.
The Tire Pressure Monitor reports a
low tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.
Observe the information in the Check Control
message.
The indicator lamp flashes and is then illumi‐
nated continuously.
No flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can
be detected.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor, refer to page 277.
Steering system
Steering system may not be working.
Have the steering system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 121
Displays Controls
121
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Engine functions
Engine function impaired.
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
For additional information, see On-board Diag‐
nostics socket, refer to page 297.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
For additional information, see Turn signal, re‐
fer to page 108.
Parking lights, headlight
Parking lights or headlights are acti‐
vated.
For additional information, see Parking
lights/low beams, automatic headlamp control,
refer to page 134.
Lane departure warning
The system is activated. At least one
lane marking was detected and warn‐
ings can be issued.
For additional information, see Lane departure
warning, refer to page 155.
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are activated.
For additional information, see Front
fog lights, refer to page 138.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off
automatically depending on the traffic
situation.
For additional information, see High-beam As‐
sistant, refer to page 136.
Automatic Hold
Automatic Hold is activated. The vehi‐
cle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
For more information, see Automatic Hold, re‐
fer to page 106.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are activated.
For additional information, see High
beams, refer to page 108.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions
occur at once, the messages are displayed
consecutively.
Seite 122
Controls Displays
122
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed
again automatically.
Temporary display
Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are
stored and can be displayed again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a
symbol in the instrument cluster explain a
Check Control message and the meaning of
the indicator and warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Additional information, such as the reason for
an error or malfunction or the required action,
can be called up via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Further help
Depending on the Check Control message,
further help can be selected.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the desired text message.
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about
the Check Control message in the
Integrated Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
▷ "BMW Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after drive-ready state is
switched off.
Fuel gauge
Instrument cluster without enhanced
features
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
An arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Information on refueling, refer to page 262.
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
The current range is displayed
as numerical value.
Seite 123
Displays Controls
123
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
An arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows
which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is
on.
Information on refueling, refer to page 262.
The yellow indicator lamp illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐
rupted to protect the engine.
Standby state and drive-
ready state
The letters OFF in the tachome‐
ter indicate that drive-ready
state is switched off and
standby state is switched on.
The letters READY in the tach‐
ometer indicate that the drive-
ready state is switched on.
For further information, see Idle state, standby
state, and drive-ready state, refer to page 19.
Engine temperature
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine
and vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the
middle or in the lower half of
the temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
the temperature range. A Check Control
message is also displayed.
A red indicator lamp is displayed.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 294.
External temperature
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, e.g., on bridges
or shady sections of road. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust your driving style to the
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Time
The time is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Setting the time and time format, refer to
page 38.
Range
Concept
The range indicates the distance that can still
be covered with the current fuel level.
General information
The estimated range available with the remain‐
ing fuel is permanently displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
With a low remaining range, a Check Control
message is briefly displayed. With a dynamic
driving style, e.g., taking curves aggressively,
the engine function is not always ensured.
Seite 124
Controls Displays
124
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Safety information
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of property
damage. Refuel promptly.◀
Display
Instrument cluster without enhanced
features
The current range is displayed
as numerical value at the bottom
of the speedometer.
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features
The current range is displayed
as numerical value next to the
fuel gauge.
Service requirements
Concept
The function displays the service requirements
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
General information
After switching on drive-ready state, the in‐
strument cluster briefly displays available driv‐
ing distance or time to the next scheduled
maintenance.
A service advisor can read out the current
service requirements from your remote con‐
trol.
Some information regarding the service re‐
quirements can also be shown on the remote
control with display.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Sym‐
bols
Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for scheduled mainte‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching.
The service deadline has already
passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required vehicle inspec‐
tions.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
Seite 125
Displays Controls
125
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Select the desired setting.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections is automatically
transmitted to your dealer’s service center be‐
fore a service due date.
You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐
ter was notified.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Teleservice Call"
Gear shift indicator
Concept
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation.
General information
Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐
try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐
tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐
tronic transmission.
Displays
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic
signs with extra symbols, e.g., for wet road
conditions, are considered and compared with
the vehicle's onboard data, such as for the rain
sensor. Next, the traffic sign will be displayed
or ignored depending on the situation. The
system takes into account the information
stored in the navigation system and also dis‐
plays speed limits present on routes without
signs.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
Seite 126
Controls Displays
126
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Display
Adjusting the display
Speed Limit Info and No Passing display are
shown in the instrument cluster and possibly in
the Head-up Display.
The Speed Limit Info displays are shown or
hidden via the operating mode of the instru‐
ment cluster.
Speed Limit Info is displayed in the following
operating mode: "STANDARD"
Speed Limit Info is not displayed in the follow‐
ing operating mode: "REDUCED"
Adjusting the operating mode of the instru‐
ment cluster, refer to page 119.
Speed Limit Info
Current speed limit.
Speed Limit Info not available.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected.
Selection lists
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following can be displayed or operated using
the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steer‐
ing wheel as well as the displays in the instru‐
ment cluster and the Head-up Display:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
Seite 127
Displays Controls
127
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list.
1.
Turn the thumbwheel and select the de‐
sired setting.
2. Press the thumbwheel.
Display
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the list in the instrument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Onboard computer in the
instrument cluster
Concept
The onboard computer displays different vehi‐
cle data in the instrument cluster, such as
average values.
Calling up information
Press and hold button on signal lever.
The respective information is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
signal lever calls up the following information in
the instrument cluster:
▷ Miles and trip miles.
▷ Fuel consumption display.
▷ Average fuel consumption and average
speed.
▷ Time of arrival and distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ In ECO PRO mode: bonus range.
Adjusting information for onboard
computer
For some information of the onboard com‐
puter, it is possible to set whether it can be
called up in the instrument cluster.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Onboard info"
6. Select the desired setting.
Seite 128
Controls Displays
128
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Information in detail
Odometer and trip odometer
Displaying/resetting miles
Press the button.
▷ When the drive-ready state
is switched off, miles and
trip miles are displayed.
▷ When drive-ready state is
switched on, the trip odome‐
ter is reset.
Display
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Fuel consumption display
Concept
During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of
the vehicle is converted into electric energy
during coasting. The vehicle battery is partially
charged and fuel consumption can be reduced.
The current fuel consumption displays the cur‐
rent consumption of fuel. Check whether you
are currently driving in an efficient and environ‐
mentally-friendly manner.
General information
Energy recovery and current fuel consumption
can be displayed as bar displays in the on‐
board computer.
Display
▷ Energy recovery, arrow 1.
▷ Current fuel consumption, arrow 2.
▷ Average fuel consumption, arrow 3.
▷ Odometer for electric driving, arrow 4.
Average speed and average fuel
consumption
General information
Average speed and average fuel consumption
are calculated for the distance traveled since
the last reset in the onboard computer.
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Seite 129
Displays Controls
129
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Display
▷ Average speed, arrow 1.
▷ Average fuel consumption, arrow 2.
Time of arrival and distance to
destination
General information
The estimated time of arrival and the distance
remaining to the destination are displayed if a
destination is entered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
Display
▷ Time of arrival, arrow 1.
▷ Distance to destination, arrow 2.
ECO PRO bonus range
In the ECO PRO mode, the ECO PRO bonus
range, refer to page 256, can be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Onboard computer on the
Control Display
Concept
The onboard computer displays different vehi‐
cle data on the Control Display, such as aver‐
age values.
General information
Two types of onboard computers are available
on the Control Display:
▷ "Onboard info": Average values, such as
the fuel consumption, are displayed. The
values can be reset individually.
▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an
overview of a certain distance and can be
reset as often as necessary.
Calling up the onboard computer or
trip computer
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the onboard computer
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"
Resetting the trip computer
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4. Move the controller to the left, if needed.
Seite 130
Controls Displays
130
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ "Reset": all values are reset.
▷ "Automatic reset": all values are
reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle
has come to a standstill.
Sport displays
Concept
On the Control Display, the current values for
performance and torque can be displayed if
the vehicle is appropriately equipped.
Displays
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sport displays"
Speed warning
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
cause a warning to be issued.
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed limit once by at
least 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
5. Turn the controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
6. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"
5. Press the controller.
Setting your current speed as the
speed warning
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"
5. Press the controller.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per‐
formed for several systems.
Opening the vehicle status
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
▷ "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat
Tire Monitor, refer to page 281.
▷ "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of the
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 277.
▷ Resetting the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer
to page 278.
▷ "Engine oil level": Electronic engine
oil level check, refer to page 290.
Seite 131
Displays Controls
131
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ "Check Control": Check Control mes‐
sages are stored in the background and
can be displayed on the Control Display.
Displaying stored Check Control mes‐
sages, refer to page 123.
▷ "Service required": Displaying serv‐
ice requirements, refer to page 125.
▷ "Teleservice Call": Service Request.
Head-up Display
Concept
This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.
General information
Read the information for cleaning the Head-up
Display, refer to page 310.
Overview
Switching on/off
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
View
Three different views are available for the
Head-up Display:
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ "STANDARD": all displays in the Head-
up Display are active.
▷ "REDUCED": the displays in the Head-
up Display are reduced to the mini‐
mum.
Seite 132
Controls Displays
132
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ "INDIVIDUAL": all displays in the Head-
up Display are active. Individual dis‐
plays, e.g., Check Control messages,
can be individually configured.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the controller.
When the low beams are activated, the bright‐
ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐
ally influenced using the instrument lighting.
Adjusting the height
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Height"
6. Turn the controller until the desired height
is reached.
7. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the rotation
The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Rotation"
6. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
7. Press the controller.
Visibility of the display
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic set‐
tings checked by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being generated.
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to
have the special windshield replaced by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop, if necessary.
Seite 133
Displays Controls
133
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Lights
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel.
Light functions
Symbol Function
Front fog lights
Lights off
Daytime running lights
Parking lights
Symbol Function
Automatic headlamp control
Adaptive Light Control
Low beams
Instrument lighting
Right roadside parking lamp
Left roadside parking lamp
Parking lights, cornering
lights and roadside parking
lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when drive-ready
state is switched off, the exterior lighting is au‐
tomatically switched off at this switch setting
only.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
and it would then be impossible to switch on
drive-ready state.
Low beams
Position of switch:
Seite 134
Controls Lights
134
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
The low beams illuminate when drive-ready
state is switched on.
Roadside parking lights
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road‐
side parking lamp can be switched on.
Button Function
Right roadside parking lamp on/off
Left roadside parking lamp on/off
Welcome lights and
headlamp courtesy delay
feature
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the exterior
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch: ,
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Welcome lights"
Parking lights and tail lamps are
switched on for a limited time.
▷ "Door handle lighting"
Door handles and the ground in front of
the doors are illuminated for a limited
time.
▷ "LED light carpet"
The area next to the vehicle is illumi‐
nated for a limited time.
Headlamp courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay lit for a particular time if
the high beams are switched on after standby
state is switched on.
Setting the duration
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.
Automatic headlamp control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight or if there is
precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
Activating
Position of switch:
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster is
illuminated when the low beams are switched
on.
System limits
The automatic headlamp control cannot serve
as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
Seite 135
Lights Controls
135
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks un‐
der these conditions, you should always switch
on the lights manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to switch
the daytime running lights off.
Switching on/off
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when
drive-ready state is switched on. After drive-
ready state is switched off, the parking lights
light up in position .
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Adaptive Light Control
Concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
General information
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows
the course of the road.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Depending on the equipment version, Adap‐
tive Light Control consists of one or several
systems:
▷ Cornering light, refer to page 136.
▷ Adaptive headlight range control, refer to
page 136.
Activating
Position of switch:
The Adaptive Light Control is active, when the
drive-ready state is switched on.
Corner-illuminating lights
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating
lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
The turning lights are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
When driving in reverse, the turning lights may
be automatically switched on regardless of the
steering angle.
Self-leveling headlights
The self-leveling headlights compensate for
acceleration and braking operations in order
not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve
optimum illumination of the roadway.
High-beam Assistant
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation.
Seite 136
Controls Lights
136
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
General information
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic
situation allows. In the low speed range, the
high beams are not switched on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
The driver can intervene at any time and switch
the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating
Position of switch:
Press and hold button on signal lever.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
The high beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically.
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
Deactivating
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 108.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press
the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
when to use the high beams. In situation that
require this, therefore switch off manually.
The system is not fully functional in the follow‐
ing situations, and driver intervention may be
necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Laser high beams
Concept
The range of the high beams is increased and
ensures an even better illumination of the road.
General information
When the high beams are switched-on, start‐
ing with a speed of approx. 60 km/h the laser
high beams in the headlight are automatically
switched on in addition to the LED high beams.
Depending on the country variant, further in‐
formation can be obtained from the laser label
on the headlight.
Seite 137
Lights Controls
137
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Safety information
The label is in the headlight and is visible from
the outside.
Fog lights
Front fog lights
Functional requirement
The low beams must be switched on before
switching on the front fog lamps.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The green indicator lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
page 135, is activated, the low beams will
come on automatically when you switch on the
front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
Settings
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment version, interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lamps, door handle
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically
controlled.
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Interior lights
Reading lights
Switching the interior lights on and off
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can
be switched on and off independently. The
button is located in the rear roofliner.
Seite 138
Controls Lights
138
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Switching the reading lamps on and
off
Press button.
The reading lamps are located at the front and
rear next to the interior lights.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the vehicle's
interior.
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,
it will not be switched on when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Switching on/off
The ambient light is switched on when the ve‐
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
The selected setting is stored for the driver
profile currently used.
Selecting color scheme
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Color"
6. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Select the desired setting.
Dimmed when driving
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Dimmed while driving"
The interior lighting is dimmed for some lights
while driving.
The selected setting is stored for the driver
profile currently used.
Panoramic glass sunroof, lighting
If the panoramic glass sunroof is opened or the
sliding visor closed, lighting of the respective
area is switched off.
BMW Touch Command
The ambient light can also be operated using
BMW Touch Command.
Bowers & Wilkins Diamond Surround
Sound System
General information
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.
Brightness can be individually set.
If the speakers are muted, speaker lighting will
be switched off.
Seite 139
Lights Controls
139
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Switching on/off
The speaker lighting is switched on when the
vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Bowers & Wilkins"
The selected setting is stored for the driver
profile currently used.
Setting the brightness
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Select the desired setting.
BMW Touch Command
The operation of the Bowers & Wilkins Dia‐
mond Surround Sound System is also possible
with BMW Touch Command.
Ambient highlight
General information
The ambient highlight illuminates the door pil‐
lars in the rear.
When opening a rear door, the brightness of
the ambient highlight of the respective door
pillar is reduced. After the rear door is closed,
the ambient highlight is illuminated again in the
previously adjusted brightness.
Switching on/off automatically
The ambient highlight is switched on when the
vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Accent lighting in rear"
The selected setting is stored for the driver
profile currently used.
Switching on/off manually
The ambient highlight is fitted with a touch
sensor. The ambient highlight is switched on
or off with a brief touch of the chrome bar.
Adjusting the brightness via iDrive
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
The last brightness set is displayed.
6. Select the desired setting.
The selected setting is stored for the driver
profile currently used.
Adjusting the brightness via touch
sensor
The ambient highlight is fitted with a touch
sensor. The brightness is changed with a long
touch of the chrome bar.
BMW Touch Command
The ambient highlight can also be operated
using BMW Touch Command.
Seite 140
Controls Lights
140
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate restraint.
Side airbag
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Seite 141
Safety Controls
141
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
impact events.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
General information
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot protect as intended or
may cause additional injuries due to triggering.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Fol‐
low the information on optimum protective ef‐
fect of the airbag system.◀
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the floor area and does not support
them on the dashboard.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ There should be no additional persons, an‐
imals or objects between an airbag and a
person.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, for instance
for GPS devices or mobile phones.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
modify them in any way.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
ties may affect the air bag system; therefore,
contact BMW Customer Relations or your au‐
thorized BMW service center.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Seite 142
Controls Safety
142
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Safety information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐
nents.◀
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
tion, the airbag system might not trigger as in‐
tended in the event of an accident despite re‐
spective accident severity. There is a risk of
injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐
tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐
ped by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Display in the instrument cluster
When drive-ready state is switched on,
the warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up briefly and thereby in‐
dicates the function readiness of the entire air‐
bag system and the belt tensioners.
Malfunction
▷ Warning lamp does not come on
when drive-ready state is switched
on.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
Have the system checked.
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat passenger airbags
Concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
sistance.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐
vated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
Safety information
WARNING
To ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
bag function, the system must be able to de‐
tect whether a person is sitting in the front
passenger seat. The entire seat cushion area
must be used for this purpose. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the
front passenger keeps his or her feet in the
floor area.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger
seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
Seite 143
Safety Controls
143
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbag in the roofliner indicates the operat‐
ing state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
After drive-ready state is switched on, the
lamp briefly lights up and then indicates
whether the airbags are either activated or de‐
activated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system or when the seat
is empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient
size is detected on the seat. The airbags
on the front passenger side are activated.
Detected child seats
The system generally detects children seated
in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐
quired by NHTSA at the point in time when the
vehicle was manufactured. After installing a
child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp
for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up.
This indicates that the child seat has been de‐
tected and the front-seat passenger airbags
are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front passenger's airbags very much depends
on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐
er's seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon
as a respective message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
A corresponding message appears on the
Control Display.
1.
Press the switch and move the respective
seat all the way forward.
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat
still moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disap‐
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Intelligent Safety
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system.
General information
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐
tems that can help prevent an imminent colli‐
sion.
▷ Approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function, refer to page 146.
Seite 144
Controls Safety
144
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ Person warning with City light braking
function, refer to page 149.
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal
detection, refer to page 152.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to
page 155.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
page 158.
▷ Side collision warning, refer to page 162.
Safety information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is a risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
Button does not light up: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
Press button:
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a set‐
ting is changed on the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
Press button repeatedly. The follow‐
ing settings are switched between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the sub-functions, e.g., setting for warning
time.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Seite 145
Safety Controls
145
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Press and hold this button:
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Approach control warning
with light braking function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
General information
The system is controlled using a camera.
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
Control with Stop & Go function, ACC, the ap‐
proach control warning is additionally control‐
led via the cruise control radar sensor.
The approach control warning is available even
if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the approach control warning and
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tem reactions.
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible risk of collision with vehicles at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of
warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐
uation.
Detection range
Objects are responded to if they are detected
by the system.
Safety information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is a risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Seite 146
Controls Safety
146
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
With Active Cruise Control: radar
sensor
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of
the front bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button:
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a set‐
ting is changed on the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
Press button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched
between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button:
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Seite 147
Safety Controls
147
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
Button does not light up: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
Setting the warning time
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Frontal Collision Warn."
5. Select the desired setting.
The selected time is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐
ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the
impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by an automatic braking intervention
in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Brake intervention, City light braking
function
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used when the brake is actuated.
Prerequisite is sufficiently quick and hard step‐
ping on the brake pedal.
The system can additionally assist possibly
with automatic braking intervention if there is a
risk of a collision.
At low speeds the vehicle can be decelerated
to a complete stop.
The braking intervention takes place up to ap‐
prox. 50 mph/80 km/h.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g., by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Observe
the limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
Seite 148
Controls Safety
148
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
With radar sensor and Active Cruise
Control: braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used when the brake is actuated.
Prerequisite is sufficiently quick and hard step‐
ping on the brake pedal.
The system can assist with automatic braking
intervention if there is a risk of a collision.
The braking intervention can bring the vehicle
to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g., by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol.
Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h the braking
intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.
No automatic delay occurs.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Observe
the limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
The following situations may not be detected,
e.g.:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.
▷ If the area of the windshield in front of the
interior mirror is dirty or covered.
▷ Depending on equipment: if the radar sen‐
sor is dirty or obscured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e.g., from the sun
low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
such as the warning time, the more warnings
are displayed. However, there may also be an
excess of premature warnings.
Person warning with City
light braking function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents with
pedestrians.
When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐
sue a warning if there is imminent risk of a col‐
Seite 149
Safety Controls
149
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
lision with pedestrians, and support with a
braking function.
General information
The system is active at speeds of approx.
6 mph/10 km/h up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h.
Under those circumstances it reacts to people
who are within the detection range of the sys‐
tem.
The camera in the area of the rearview mirror
controls the system.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Safety information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is a risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Seite 150
Controls Safety
150
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button:
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a set‐
ting is changed on the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
Press button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched
between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button:
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
Button does not light up: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used when the brake is actuated.
Prerequisite for the brake booster is suffi‐
ciently quick and hard stepping on the brake
pedal.
The system can additionally assist with braking
intervention if there is a risk of a collision.
At low speeds the vehicle can be decelerated
to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g., by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Seite 151
Safety Controls
151
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Object detection can be restricted. Observe
the limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
The following situations may not be detected,
e.g.:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e.g., from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Night Vision with pedestrian
and animal detection
Concept
Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
tion is a night vision system.
An infrared camera scans the area in front of
the vehicle and issues a warning if it detects
pedestrians and animals on the street. The
system detects warm objects that are similar in
shape to human beings or animals. If neces‐
sary, the thermal image can be displayed on
the Control Display.
General information
Thermal image
The image shows the heat radiated by objects
in the field of view of the camera.
Warm objects have a light appearance and
cold objects a dark appearance.
The ability to detect an object depends on the
temperature difference between the object
and the background and on the level of heat
radiation emitted by the object. Objects that
are similar in temperature to the environment
Seite 152
Controls Safety
152
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
or that radiate very little heat are difficult to de‐
tect.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambi‐
ent light, the image is only displayed when the
low beams are activated.
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for
a fraction of a second.
Pedestrian and animal detection
Object detection and warning only functions in
darkness.
Objects whose form is similar to people with
sufficient heat radiation are detected.
In addition, the system also detects animals
above a certain minimum size, e.g., deer.
Display on the Control Display with thermal im‐
age activated:
▷ People detected by the system: in light
yellow.
▷ Animals detected by the system: in dark
yellow.
Range of object detection, with good ambient
conditions:
▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx.
330 ft/100 m
▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx.
490 ft/150 m
▷ Detection of medium animals: up to ap‐
prox. 230 ft/70 m
Environmental influences can limit the availa‐
bility of object detection.
If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is
located in a residential area, the animal detec‐
tion is temporarily switched off.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Thermal image
Seite 153
Safety Controls
153
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Camera
The camera is automatically heated when the
external temperatures are low.
The camera lens is automatically cleaned to‐
gether with the headlights.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
When it is dark outside, the system is automat‐
ically active after every driving off.
Switching on the thermal image
The thermal image from the Night Vision cam‐
era can be displayed on the Control Display in
addition to the warning function. This function
has no effect on object detection.
Press button.
The image from the camera is displayed on the
Control Display.
Adjusting the thermal image
Brightness and contrast can be adjusted, when
the thermal image is switched on.
Via iDrive:
1.
Select brightness or contrast.
▷ "Brightness".
▷ "Contrast".
2. Set the desired value.
WARNING
Display
Symbol Meaning
Person warning.
Animal warning.
Symbol lights up red. Prewarning.
Symbol flashes red and a
signal sounds.
Acute warning.
The displayed symbol may vary and shows the
side of the road on which the person or animal
was detected.
Warning of people or animals in
danger
If a collision with a person or an animal de‐
tected in this way is imminent, a warning sym‐
bol appears on the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
Although both the shape and the heat radiation
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled
out.
Warning area in front of the vehicle
The warning area for the person warning con‐
sists of two parts:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
Seite 154
Controls Safety
154
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
With animal warnings, no distinction is made
between the central or expanded area.
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
the direction of the steering angle and changes
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed
increases, the area becomes, e.g., longer and
wider.
Prewarning
Prewarning for persons is displayed when a
person is detected in the central area immedi‐
ately in front of the vehicle as well as on the left
or right side in the extended area.
Prewarning for animals is displayed when an
animal is detected in the front of the vehicle.
The driver must intervene actively by braking
or making an evasive maneuver when there is a
prewarning.
Acute warning
Acute warning is displayed if a person or an
animal is detected in direct proximity in front of
the vehicle.
The driver must immediately intervene actively
by braking or making an evasive maneuver
when there is an acute warning.
Display in the Head-up Display
The warning is displayed simultaneously in the
Head-up Display and on the instrument clus‐
ter.
System limits
Basic limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
▷ If the camera is soiled or damaged.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ At very high external temperatures.
Limits of pedestrian and animal
detection
In some situations, it may occur that pedes‐
trians are detected as animals or animals as
pedestrians.
Small animals are not detected by the object
detection function, even if they are clearly visi‐
ble in the image.
Limited detection, e.g., in the following circum‐
stances:
▷ People or animals who are fully or partially
covered, especially when their heads are
covered.
▷ People who are not in an upright position,
e.g., lying down.
▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,
recumbent bicycles).
▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g.,
after an accident.
No display on the rear screen
The image from Night Vision cannot be dis‐
played on the rear screen.
Lane departure warning
Concept
The lane departure warning alerts when the
vehicle on roads with lane markings is about to
leave the lane.
General information
This camera-based system warns starting at a
minimum speed.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety
systems.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
the event of warnings. The time of the warning
Seite 155
Safety Controls
155
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Vehicles with side collision warning: if in the
speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h, a lane
marking is crossed, the system intervenes with
a brief active steering intervention in addition
to vibrating and helps to keep the vehicle in the
lane.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release the driver
from the personal responsibility to correctly
assess route and traffic situation. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to
the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and
actively intervene in the respective situations.
In the event of a warning, do not unnecessarily
jerk the steering wheel.◀
Functional requirements
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the lane departure warning to be active.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The lane departure warning activates automat‐
ically after departure, if the function was
switched on the last time the engine was stop‐
ped.
Switching on/off manually
Press button:
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a set‐
ting is changed on the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
Press button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched
between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
Seite 156
Controls Safety
156
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button:
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
Button does not light up: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
Setting warning sensitivities
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Lane Departure Warn."
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Always": the system always alerts
within the technical limitations.
▷ "Reduced": some warning are sup‐
pressed depending on the situation,
e.g., during passing without turn signal
or when purposefully driving over lane
markings in curves.
▷ "Off": no warnings are issued.
The selected setting is stored for the driver
profile currently used.
Setting the force of the steering wheel
vibration
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Steering wheel vibration"
4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety
systems and stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Vehicles with side collision warning:
switching steering intervention on/off
The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion and lane departure warning.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Steering intervention"
The selected setting is stored for the driver
profile currently used.
Display in the instrument cluster
The system illuminates green: at least
one lane marking was detected and
warnings can be issued.
WARNING
If you leave the lane
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
With side collision warning
If in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h
a lane marking is crossed, the system inter‐
Seite 157
Safety Controls
157
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
venes with a brief active steering intervention
in addition to vibrating and helps to keep the
vehicle in the lane. The steering intervention
can be noticed on the steering wheel and can
be manually overridden at any time.
End of warning
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e.g., from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
the more warnings are displayed. However,
there may also be an excess of undesired
warnings.
Active Blind Spot Detection
Concept
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles in
the blind spot or vehicles approaching from
behind in the adjacent lane. This is signaled by
a warning.
General information
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind and next to the vehicle starting
from a preset minimum speed.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety
systems.
Seite 158
Controls Safety
158
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐
cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror lights up dim‐
med.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
uations described above.
The lamp in the exterior mirror flashes and the
steering wheel vibrates.
Vehicles with side collision warning: at speeds
between 45 mph/70 km/h and
130 mph/210 km/h, the system can intervene
with a brief active steering intervention and
help to return the vehicle into the lane.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The Active Blind Spot Detection is automati‐
cally activated after departure, if the function
was switched on the last time the engine was
stopped.
Switching on/off manually
Press button:
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a set‐
ting is changed on the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
Press button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched
between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
Seite 159
Safety Controls
159
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button:
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
Button does not light up: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
Setting the warning time
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Blind Spot Detection"
5. Select the desired setting.
"Off": With this setting, no warning is out‐
put.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the force of the steering wheel
vibration
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Steering wheel vibration"
4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety
systems and stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Vehicles with side collision warning:
switching steering intervention on/off
The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion and lane departure warning.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Steering intervention"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
WARNING
Lamp in the exterior mirror
Prewarning
The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror indi‐
cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot
or approaching from behind.
Acute warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the lamp in the exterior mirror flashes
brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.
Seite 160
Controls Safety
160
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
With side collision warning
If at speeds between 45 mph/70 km/h and
130 mph/210 km/h, the vibrating steering
wheel is ignored and the lane marking crossed,
the system intervenes with a brief active steer‐
ing intervention and helps to return the vehicle
into the lane. The steering intervention can be
noticed on the steering wheel and can be man‐
ually overridden at any time.
Flashing of the lamp
A flashing of the lamp during vehicle unlocking
serves as system self-test.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
For vehicles with side collision warning, the
steering intervention can be limited, e.g., in the
following situation:
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ When the lane markings are not white.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e.g., from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
Displaying warnings
Depending on the selected warning settings,
e.g., warning time, more warnings can be dis‐
played. However, there may also be an excess
of premature warnings of critical vehicles.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Seite 161
Safety Controls
161
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Side collision warning
Concept
The system helps to avoid imminent side colli‐
sions.
General information
Four radar sensors in the bumpers monitor the
area next to the vehicle in the speed range
from approx. 45 mph/70 km/h to ap‐
prox. 130 mph/210 km/h.
The front camera determines the lane marking
positions.
If, e.g., another vehicle is detected next to the
vehicle and if there is a risk of collision with this
vehicle, the system helps the driver to avoid
the collision via steering intervention.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
Functional requirements
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the side collision warning with steering inter‐
vention to be active.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Front bumper.
Rear bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Seite 162
Controls Safety
162
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The side collision warning activates automati‐
cally after departure, if the function was
switched on the last time the engine was stop‐
ped.
Switching on/off manually
Press button:
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a set‐
ting is changed on the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
Press button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched
between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button:
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
Button does not light up: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
WARNING
Lamp in the exterior mirror
If there is a risk of collision
If there is a risk of collision, the lamp in the ex‐
terior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vi‐
brates. An active steering intervention takes
place to prevent collisions and maintain the ve‐
hicle within its own lane. The steering interven‐
tion can be noticed on the steering wheel and
can be manually overridden at any time.
Seite 163
Safety Controls
163
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumpers are dirty or iced up, or cov‐
ered with stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e.g., from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Rear collision prevention
Concept
The system reacts to vehicles approaching
from behind.
General information
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
If a vehicle approaches from the rear at a cer‐
tain speed, the system responds as follows:
Seite 164
Controls Safety
164
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ Active Protection, refer to page 166: if a
collision seems to be unavoidable, Pre‐
Crash functions are triggered.
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
The system is deactivated in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ When driving in reverse.
▷ If the trailer power socket is in use, e.g.,
during operation with trailer or bicycle rack.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ When the approaching vehicle approaches
slowly.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Brake force display
Concept
Additional brake lamps indicate emergency
braking to the traffic behind. This can reduce
the risk of a rear-end collision.
Seite 165
Safety Controls
165
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
General information
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lights additionally light up.
Active Protection
Concept
Active Protection prepares occupants and the
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving
or collision situations.
General information
Active Protection consists of various PreCrash
functions, which can vary depending on the
equipment.
The system is used to detect certain critical
driving situations that might lead to an acci‐
dent. This includes the following critical driving
situations:
▷ Emergency stop.
▷ Severe understeering.
▷ Severe oversteering.
Certain functions of several systems can -
within the system limits - lead to Active Pro‐
tection triggering:
▷ Approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function: automatic brake intervention.
▷ Approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function or Night Vision with Dynamic
Marker Light: brake booster.
▷ Rear collision prevention: detection of im‐
minent rear collisions.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐
its, critical situation could not be detected reli‐
ably or in time. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
vene in the respective situations.◀
Function
When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's
and passenger's belt straps are automatically
tightened once after driving away.
In accident-critical situations, the following in‐
dividual functions become active as needed:
▷ Automatic pretensioning of the front safety
belts.
▷ Automatic window closing up to a narrow
gap.
▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof, in‐
cluding sliding visor.
▷ For vehicles equipped with comfort seats
in the front: automatic positioning of the
backrest for the front passenger seat.
▷ For vehicles equipped with comfort rear
seats: automatic positioning of the back‐
rests for the rear passenger seats.
After a critical driving situation without an acci‐
dent, the front safety belts are loosened again.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety
belt using the red button in the buckle. Fasten
the safety belt before continuing on your trip.
All other systems can be restored to the de‐
sired setting.
Seite 166
Controls Safety
166
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Post Crash — iBrake
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the vehicle to a halt automatically without
intervention by the driver in certain situations.
This can reduce the risk of a further collision
and the consequences thereof.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically.
Harder vehicle braking
It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in cer‐
tain situations to a halt quicker.
Here, a higher braking pressure must be gen‐
erated for a short period when pressing the
brake pedal than during automatic braking.
This interrupts automatic braking.
Interrupting automatic braking
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic
braking in certain situations, e.g., for an evasive
maneuver.
Interrupt automatic braking:
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
Attentiveness assistant
Concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness or
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
trips, e.g., on highways. In this situation, it is
recommended that the driver takes a break.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess
one's physical state. An increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not
be detected in time. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Make sure that the driver is rested and
alert. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
ditions.◀
Function
The system is switched on each time drive-
ready state is switched on.
After travel has begun, the system monitors
certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that
decreasing alertness or fatigue can be de‐
tected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐
ior.
▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip.
The system is active starting from ap‐
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h and can display a break
recommendation in addition to the alertness
assistant.
Break recommendation
Switching on/off, adjusting
The Attentiveness Assistant is active automat‐
ically with each switching on of drive-ready
state and can thus display a break recommen‐
dation.
The break recommendation can also be
switched on or off via iDrive and adjusted:
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Driver attention control"
4. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Off": no break recommendation is
made.
▷ "Standard": the break recommendation
is made with a defined value.
Seite 167
Safety Controls
167
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ "Sensitive": the break recommendation
is issued earlier.
Display
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display
with the recommendation to take a break.
During the display, the following settings can
be selected:
▷ "Do not ask again"
▷ "Places to stop"
▷ "Remind me later"
The break recommendation is repeated af‐
ter 20 minutes.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following
situations, e.g., and will either output an incor‐
rect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, e.g., in the case of a break
during longer trips on highways.
Seite 168
Controls Safety
168
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, the system
automatically produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
Adaptive brake assistant
In combination with the Active Cruise Control,
this system ensures that the brakes respond
even more rapidly when braking in critical sit‐
uations.
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on inclines.
Driving away
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
After the accelerator pedal is depressed, the
vehicle is held until it is driven off.
Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle
may roll back slightly.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐
ing engine speed and by braking the individual
wheels.
General information
Dynamic Stability Control detects, e.g., the fol‐
lowing unstable driving conditions:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
Seite 169
Driving stability control systems Controls
169
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
When driving with roof load, e.g., with
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due
to the elevated center of gravity. There is a risk
of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC
when driving with roof load.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF
Deactivating/activating DSC
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
in curves.
Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active
Steering system are only performed by the
rear axle steering.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Hold the button down until DSC OFF
is displayed in the instrument cluster
and the DSC OFF indicator lamp is illuminated.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Display
In the instrument cluster
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
Concept
DTC is a version of the DSC where forward
momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum headway on
special road conditions or loose road surfaces,
e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐
what limited driving stability.
General information
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Seite 170
Controls Driving stability control systems
170
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in
the following situations:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
driving off from loose ground.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF
Activating/deactivating DTC
Activating DTC
Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
tor lamp go out.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp lights up: DTC is
activated.
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the ve‐
hicle. The interaction of xDrive and DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control further optimizes trac‐
tion and driving dynamics. xDrive variably
distributes the driving forces to the front and
rear axles as demanded by the driving situation
and road surface.
Integral Active Steering
Concept
Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac‐
tive Steering and rear axle steering.
The system varies the steering angle of the
wheels in relation to the steering wheel move‐
ment.
With strong steering movements and low
speeds, e.g., when parking, the wheel angle is
magnified, that is, the steering is more direct.
The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu‐
verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in
a direction opposite to the front wheels.
At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned in
the same direction as the front wheels.
In critical driving situations, the Integral Active
Steering can stabilize the vehicle through pur‐
poseful steering of the rear wheels before the
driver intervenes, e.g., in case of oversteering.
General information
The system offers several different tunings.
Seite 171
Driving stability control systems Controls
171
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Driving
mode
Integral Active Steering
COMFORT/
ECO PRO
comfortable, for optimal travel
comfort
SPORT dynamic, for greater agility
The different tunings are assigned to the dif‐
ferent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics
Control, refer to page 116.
Using snow chains
When snow chains are in use, refer to
page 277, rear wheel steering is deactivated.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the steering
wheel must be turned further, while the vehicle
responds more sensitively to steering wheel
movements in the higher speed range.
The stability-enhancing intervention may be
deactivated.
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
Have the system checked.
Seite 172
Controls Driving stability control systems
172
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Driver assistance systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically
as needed.
General information
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control characteristic can change in certain
ranges. For instance, the acceleration in ECO
PRO driving mode is more gentle.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of property
damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.◀
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 174.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 174.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 175.
Store speed, refer to page 174.
Rocker switch: adjust speed, refer to
page 174.
Seite 173
Driver assistance systems Controls
173
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Switching cruise control on/off
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
DSC will be switched on, if needed.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Setting the speed
Maintaining and storing the speed
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed, refer to
page 175, in the speedometer and briefly in
the instrument cluster.
DSC will be switched on, if needed.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
Press button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the resistance point, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Pausing cruise control
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button.
Seite 174
Controls Driver assistance systems
174
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
Continuing cruise control
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
Press button with the system inter‐
rupted.
Cruise control is continued with the saved val‐
ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Display in the speedometer
▷ Green marking: system is
active, the marking indicates
the desired speed.
▷ Orange/white marking: sys‐
tem is interrupted, the mark‐
ing indicates the stored
speed.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Indicator lamp
▷ Indicator lamp green: system is ac‐
tive.
▷ Gray indicator lamp: the system has
been interrupted.
▷ No indicator lamp: system is switched off.
Status display
The selected desired speed is hidden
after a brief time.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
The symbol is displayed when the set
desired speed is reached.
System limits
The desired speed is also maintained downhill.
The speed may not be maintained on uphill
grades if the engine power is insufficient.
Due to the driving style that minimizes fuel
consumption in ECO PRO driving mode, the
vehicle may drop below the set desired speed
in some situations, e.g., on uphill grades.
Active Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function, ACC
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed on
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle ac‐
celerates or brakes automatically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of your vehicle within the
given system limits so that the set distance to
the vehicle ahead is maintained.
Seite 175
Driver assistance systems Controls
175
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
General information
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
and a camera on the interior mirror to detect
vehicles driving ahead of you.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control characteristic can change in certain
ranges. For instance, the acceleration in ECO
PRO driving mode is more gentle.
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec‐
tive speed.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and
then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐
riod, the system is able to detect this within the
given system limits.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Risk of accident due to too high speed
differences to other vehicles, e.g., in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
vehicle.
▷ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own
lane.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene in
the respective situations.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 177.
Store/maintain speed, refer to
page 178.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 177.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 179.
Without steering and lane control
assistant:
Increase distance, refer to
page 179.
Without steering and lane control
assistant:
Reduce distance, refer to page 179.
Seite 176
Controls Driver assistance systems
176
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Button Function
With steering and lane control assis‐
tant:
Adjust distance, refer to page 178.
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to page 178.
With steering and lane control assis‐
tant:
Steering and lane control assistant
incl. Traffic Jam Assist on/off, refer
to page 182.
Radar sensor
The radar sensor is located in the front
bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Area of application
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set is
115 mph/180 km/h.
The system can also be activated when sta‐
tionary.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
DSC will be switched on, if needed.
Switching off
To switch off the system while standing, step
on brake pedal at the same time.
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
If interrupting the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
Seite 177
Driver assistance systems Controls
177
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled and the driv‐
er's door is opened while the vehicle is
standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for
an extended period, e.g., on a road with
very little traffic without curb or shoulder
markings.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is im‐
paired, e.g., by dirt or heavy fog.
▷ After a longer stationary period when the
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the
system.
Setting the speed
Maintaining and storing the speed
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐
eter and briefly in the instrument cluster, refer
to page 179.
DSC will be switched on, if needed.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
Press button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the resistance point, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Adjusting distance
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐
its, braking can be late. There is a risk of acci‐
dents or risk of property damage. Be aware to
the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the dis‐
tance to the traffic and weather conditions and
maintain the prescribed safety distance, possi‐
bly by braking.◀
Seite 178
Controls Driver assistance systems
178
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Without steering and lane control
assistant: reducing distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 179.
Without steering and lane control
assistant: increasing distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 179.
With steering and lane control
assistant: adjusting distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Continuing cruise control
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
Press button with the system inter‐
rupted.
Cruise control is continued with the saved val‐
ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Display in the speedometer
▷ Green marking: system is
active, the marking indicates
the desired speed.
▷ Orange/white marking: sys‐
tem is interrupted, the mark‐
ing indicates the stored
speed.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Status display
The selected desired speed is hidden
after a brief time.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you
is shown.
Symbol Description
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set automatically
after the system is switched
on.
Seite 179
Driver assistance systems Controls
179
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Symbol Description
System interrupted.
No distance control display, as
the accelerator pedal is being
pressed.
Detected vehicle
Symbol Description
Green symbol:
A vehicle has been detected
ahead of you. The system
maintains the set distance to
the vehicle in front.
As soon as the detected vehicle drives off, the
vehicle symbol in the distance indicator will
move away.
To accelerate, activate ACC by briefly stepping
on the accelerator pedal or pressing the rocker
switch.
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol Description
Vehicle symbol flashes:
The conditions are not ade‐
quate for the system to work.
The system was deactivated
but applies the brakes until you
actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
The vehicle symbol and dis‐
tance bars flash red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
You are requested to intervene
by braking or make an evasive
maneuver.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Desired speed
Some system information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
The symbol is displayed when the set
desired speed is reached.
Distance information
The symbol is displayed when the dis‐
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead
is too short.
The distance information is active in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.
▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected,
refer to page 132.
▷ Distance too short.
▷ Speed greater than approx.
40 mph/70 km/h.
Seite 180
Controls Driver assistance systems
180
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
System limits
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not
be detected.
Deceleration
The system also does not decelerate in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving
road users.
▷ For red traffic lights.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐
hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,
the system requests that the driver intervene
by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐
vers, if needed.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
In tight curves the system offers only restricted
detection where a vehicle ahead of you might
be detected late or not at all.
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐
ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐
ating. After releasing the accelerator pedal the
system is reactivated and controls speed inde‐
pendently.
Seite 181
Driver assistance systems Controls
181
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep inclines.
▷ From bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Weather
In the event of unfavorable weather and light
conditions, e.g., if there is rain, snowfall, slush,
fog or glare, this may result in poorer recogni‐
tion of vehicles as well as short-term interrup‐
tions for vehicles that are already detected.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, e.g.,
by braking, steering or evading.
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill.
The speed may not be maintained on uphill
grades if the engine power is insufficient.
Due to the driving style that minimizes fuel
consumption in ECO PRO driving mode, the
vehicle may drop below the set desired speed
in some situations, e.g., on uphill grades.
Radar sensor
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ OAYARS3-A
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be
caused by damage incurred, e.g., during park‐
ing.
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
The function for detecting and responding
when approaching stationary vehicles may be
limited in the following situations:
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A
Check Control message is displayed.
Steering and lane control
assistant incl. Traffic Jam
Assist
Concept
The system assists the driver in keeping the
vehicle within the lane. For this purpose, the
system executes supporting steering move‐
ments, e.g., when driving in a curve.
General information
The system determines the position of the
lane markings and the vehicle driving ahead
using five radar sensors and a camera.
Depending on the speed, the system orients it‐
self according to the lane markings or vehicles
in front.
Seite 182
Controls Driver assistance systems
182
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
Overview
Button on the steering wheel
Button Function
Switch steering and lane control as‐
sistant incl. Traffic Jam Assist on/off,
refer to page 184.
Radar sensors
Keep radar sensors clean and unobstructed.
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Front center bumper
Front side bumper
Rear bumper
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Functional requirements
▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▷ Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane
marking on both sides is detected.
Seite 183
Driver assistance systems Controls
183
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane
marking on both sides or a vehicle driving
ahead is detected.
▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim.
▷ Wide curves.
▷ Drive in the center of the lane.
▷ Turn signal not actuated.
▷ Camera calibration immediately after vehi‐
cle delivery is completed.
Switching on/off
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled, refer to
page 183.
Steering wheel symbol lights up green.
The system is active.
With the system switched on, the person
warning with City light braking and the side
collision warning functions are active. The Per‐
son warning settings, refer to page 147, are
considered again when the system is switched
off.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator goes out.
The system does not manipulate steering.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ When the steering wheel is released.
▷ When you manipulate steering.
▷ When you leave your own lane.
▷ When the turn signal is on.
▷ When the lane is too narrow.
▷ If for a particular time no lane marking is
detected and there is no vehicle driving in
front.
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled, refer to
page 183.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Symbol Description
Steering wheel symbol gray:
the system is on standby.
Steering wheel symbol green:
system activated.
Steering wheel symbol and
lane marking green: the system
assists the driver in keeping
the vehicle within the lane.
Steering wheel symbol green,
lane marking gray: no lane
marking detected. The vehicle
follows the vehicle in front.
Seite 184
Controls Driver assistance systems
184
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Symbol Description
Steering wheel symbol yellow:
hold steering wheel. The sys‐
tem is still active.
Steering wheel symbol red and
a signal tone sounds: system
interrupted. The system does
not manipulate steering.
Displays in the Head-up Display
All system information can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Functional limitations
The system cannot be activated or meaning‐
fully used in certain situations.
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering
wheel contact in the following situations:
▷ Driving with gloves.
▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel.
When driving within narrow lanes, the system
cannot be activated or effectively used, e.g., in
the following situations:
▷ In construction areas.
▷ In rescue lanes.
▷ Within city limits.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un‐
favorable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light con‐
ditions:
▷ Rain.
▷ Snowfall.
▷ Slush.
▷ Fog.
▷ Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, e.g.,
by braking, steering or evading.
PDC Park Distance Control
Concept
PDC is a support when parking. Objects that
you are approaching slowly in front of or be‐
hind the vehicle are indicated with:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
With parking assistant: obstacles on the side of
the vehicle that are detected by the sensors of
the parking assistant, may also be reported by
the side protection, refer to page 188, func‐
tion.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for distance measure‐
ments are located in the bumpers and possibly
on the sides of the vehicle.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the follow‐
ing situations:
Seite 185
Driver assistance systems Controls
185
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ By the front middle sensors at a distance
to the object of approx. 74 in/70 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at a distance to
the object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ By the corner sensors at a distance to the
object of approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ With parking assistant: by the side sensors
at a distance to the object of ap‐
prox. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ When a collision is imminent.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐
vated, the warning can be delayed due to
physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury
or risk of property damage. Avoid approaching
an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while
PDC is not yet active.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
e.g., in the bumpers.
Functional requirements
To ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers,
bicycle racks.
▷ Keep sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged
when the engine is running.
▷ While approaching detected obstacles if
the speed is slower than approx.
2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance
depends on the situation in question.
You may switch automatic activation on and off
when obstacles are detected.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC activation": only with re‐
spective equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on equipment, an additional cam‐
era view is also switched on.
Seite 186
Controls Driver assistance systems
186
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
WARNING
Signal tones
General information
When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E.g.,
if an object is detected to the left rear of the
vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
If there are objects in front of and behind the
vehicle at the same time, with a distance
smaller than approx. 10 in/25 cm, an alternat‐
ing constant tone will sound.
The interval tone and constant tone are
switched off if the selector lever position P is
engaged.
The interval tone is switched off after a short
time when the vehicle is stationary.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Tone"
4. "Volume settings"
5. "PDC"
6. Set the desired value.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the Con‐
trol Display before a signal sounds.
The display appears as soon as PDC is acti‐
vated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red.
Pathway lines are faded in for better estimation
of the required space.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a
different view with obstacle markings as
needed:
"Rear view camera"
Crossing traffic warning, refer to page 207:
depending on the equipment, it is warned in
the PDC display against vehicles approaching
in the front or rear from the side.
Seite 187
Driver assistance systems Controls
187
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
With parking assistant: emergency
braking function, Active PDC
Concept
The emergency braking function of PDC ini‐
tiates an emergency braking in case of acute
risk of collision.
General information
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre‐
vented under all circumstances.
The function is available from walking speed
while backing up or rolling backward.
A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the
braking intervention.
After emergency braking to a stop, further
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. To
creep toward the obstacle, lightly press the ac‐
celerator pedal and release it again.
If the accelerator pedal is heavily depressed,
the vehicle drives off as usual. Manual braking
is possible at any time.
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of
PDC and parking assistant.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively intervene in the respective
situations.◀
Activating/deactivating the system
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Active PDC with braking interv."
5. "Active PDC with braking interv."
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
With parking assistant: side
protection
Concept
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
the vehicle.
General information
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of
PDC and parking assistant.
Display
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the vehicle at the
sides.
▷ Color markings, arrow 1: warning against
detected obstacles.
▷ Gray markings, hatched area, arrow 2: no
obstacles were detected.
▷ No markings, black area, arrow 3: the area
next to the vehicle was not yet captured.
Limits of side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
The system does not detect whether an obsta‐
cle moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary,
the markings are shown in gray after some
time. The area next to the vehicle must be
newly captured.
Seite 188
Controls Driver assistance systems
188
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.,
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g., from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ With small and low objects, e.g., boxes.
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷ With plants and bushes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs,
can move into the blind area of the sensors
before or after a continuous tone sounds.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter
of the vehicle is not taken into account by
the system.
False warnings
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no ob‐
stacle within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
rages.
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐
tion on obstacle detection, e.g., in vehicle
washes to reduce false alarms, refer to
page 186.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
White symbol is displayed, and the
range of the sensors is dimmed on the
Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
Seite 189
Driver assistance systems Controls
189
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Without Surround View:
rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively intervene in the respective
situations.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
necessary, clean the camera lens.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if se‐
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
gine is running.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
Switching the view via iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Seite 190
Controls Driver assistance systems
190
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Functional requirements
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems
and trailers that are not connected to a
trailer power socket can lead to malfunc‐
tions.
Assistance functions
General information
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
The assistance functions can be manually acti‐
vated.
▷ "Parking aid lines"
Pathway lines and turning radius lines are
displayed, refer to page 191.
▷ "Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed,
refer to page 191.
Parking aid lines
Pathway lines
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the steering angle
and are continuously adjusted to the steering
wheel movements.
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Parking using pathway and turning radius
lines
1.
Position the vehicle so that the red turning
radius line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
sponding turning radius line.
Obstacle marking
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by
the PDC sensors.
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.
Seite 191
Driver assistance systems Controls
191
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC.
Setting brightness and contrast via
iDrive
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Move the controller to the left.
2.
▷ "Brightness"
▷ "Contrast"
3. Set the desired value.
System limits
Deactivated camera
If the camera is deactivated, e.g., if the tailgate
is open, the camera image is displayed
hatched in gray.
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Assistance functions also take into account
data of the PDC.
Observe the notes in the PDC Park Distance
Control chapter, refer to page 185.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti‐
mate the distance from the objects on the dis‐
play.
Surround View
Concept
The system provides assistance in parking and
maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is
shown on the Control Display.
General information
Several cameras capture the area from differ‐
ent selectable perspectives. In addition, assis‐
tance functions, e.g., guidelines, can be faded
into the display.
The following camera perspectives can be dis‐
played:
▷ Automatic camera perspective, refer to
page 194: the system shows the camera
perspective suitable for the respective
driving situation.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 194: to
represent the areas behind the vehicle.
▷ Right-hand and left-hand side view, refer
to page 196: for representing the areas on
the sides of the vehicle.
▷ Camera perspective movable via iDrive, re‐
fer to page 194.
▷ Panorama View, refer to page 196: to
present cross traffic, e.g., at junctions and
driveways, depending on the currently en‐
gaged gear.
Depending on the view, the environment
around the vehicle or a part of it is depicted.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively intervene in the respective
situations.◀
Seite 192
Controls Driver assistance systems
192
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Panorama View
Cameras
Front camera
Rearview camera
One camera is located at the bottom of each
exterior mirror housing.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt on
the camera lenses. Clean the camera lenses if
necessary.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if se‐
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
gine is running.
The camera perspective suitable for the re‐
spective driving situation is displayed.
Switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera cannot be switched off if
the reverse gear is engaged.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Seite 193
Driver assistance systems Controls
193
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Camera perspective
Overview
1 Function bar
2 Selection window
3 Side view
4 Automatic camera perspective
5 Movable camera perspective
6 Camera image
7 Rearview camera
Selection window
The individual camera perspectives can be se‐
lected in the selection window via iDrive.
Side view
The side view can be selected for the right or
left vehicle side.
This view helps when positioning the vehicle at
the curb or with other obstacles on the side by
displaying the side surroundings.
The side view looks from rear to front and in
case of danger, focuses automatically on pos‐
sible obstacles.
Automatic camera perspective
The automatic camera perspective shows a
steering-dependent view in the respective
driving direction.
This perspective adapts to the respective driv‐
ing situation.
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
changes to a fixed display of the area in front or
at the rear behind the bumper or, if necessary,
changes to a side view.
Movable camera perspective
With selection of the movable camera per‐
spective, a circle appears on the Control Dis‐
play.
By turning the controller or via touch function,
specified perspectives on the circle can be se‐
lected.
The current perspective is marked with a cam‐
era symbol.
With BMW Gesture Control: an additional cam‐
era symbol appears on the circle. This camera
symbol is freely movable via BMW Gesture
Control, refer to page 30.
To leave the circle, move the controller side‐
ways and press or tap the active camera sym‐
bol via the touchscreen.
Rearview camera
This view shows the picture of the rearview
camera.
Function bar
Assistance functions, refer to page 194, can
be activated via the function bar and settings
applied.
▷ "Parking Assistant", refer to page 198.
▷ "Brightness", refer to page 197.
▷ "Contrast", refer to page 197.
▷ "Parking aid lines", refer to page 195.
▷ "Obstacle marking", refer to page 195.
▷ "Car wash", refer to page 196.
▷ "Settings": apply settings, e.g., to use
the activation points for Panorama View.
Assistance functions
General information
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
Seite 194
Controls Driver assistance systems
194
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
The following assistance functions can be
manually activated:
▷ "Parking aid lines"
▷ "Obstacle marking"
▷ "Car wash"
The following assistance functions are auto‐
matically displayed:
▷ Side protection, refer to page 196.
▷ Door opening angle, refer to page 196.
Parking aid lines
Pathway lines
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the steering angle
and are continuously adjusted to the steering
wheel movements.
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Parking using pathway and turning radius
lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
radius line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
sponding turning radius line.
Obstacle marking
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by
the PDC sensors.
Obstacle markings can be shown in the cam‐
era image.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC.
Seite 195
Driver assistance systems Controls
195
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Vehicle wash view
The vehicle wash view assists when entering a
vehicle wash by displaying the floor and the
vehicle's own track.
Side protection
Concept
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the vehicle at the
sides.
▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected.
▷ Color markings: warning against detected
obstacles.
Limits of side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
The system does not detect whether an obsta‐
cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand‐
still, the markings are not shown anymore in
the display after a certain time. The area next
to the vehicle must be newly captured.
Door opening angle
The maximum opening angle of the doors is
displayed in selector lever position P.
Panorama View
Concept
The system provides an early look at cross
traffic at blind driveways and intersections.
General information
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
and right of the vehicle can only be detected
relatively late from the driver's seat. The cam‐
eras in the front and rear capture the sideways
traffic area to improve the view.
Yellow lines in the screen display mark the
front and rear end of the vehicle.
The camera image shows different levels of
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita‐
ble for distance estimations.
Seite 196
Controls Driver assistance systems
196
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Display on the Control Display
Press the button when the engine is run‐
ning.
Depending on the driving direction, the image
of the respective camera is displayed:
▷ "front": front camera image.
▷ "rear": rear camera image.
The crossing traffic warning, refer to
page 207, can additionally warn against on‐
coming vehicles using radar sensors.
With navigation system: activation
points
Concept
Positions at which Panorama View is to switch
on automatically can be stored as activation
points as soon as a GPS signal is received.
General information
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
Activation points can be used when driving for‐
ward for the front camera.
Storing activation points
1.
Drive to the position at which the system is
to be switched on, and stop.
2.
Press button.
3. Move the controller to the left.
4. "Add activation point"
The current position is displayed.
5. "Add activation point"
Activation points are, if possible, stored with
town/city and street address or with the GPS
coordinates.
Using activation points
The use of activation points can be switched
on and off.
1.
Press button.
2. Move the controller to the left.
3. "Settings"
4. "Panorama view, GPS-based"
5. "Panorama view, GPS-based"
Displaying activation points
1. Press button.
2. Move the controller to the left.
3. "Show activation points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
Renaming or deleting activation points
1. Press button.
2. Move the controller to the left.
3. "Show activation points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
4. Select an activation point as needed.
5. "Rename", "Delete this activation point" or
"Delete all activation points".
Setting brightness and contrast
Brightness and contrast can be adjusted with
Surround View or Panorama View switched on.
Via iDrive:
1.
Move the controller to the left.
2.
▷ "Brightness"
▷ "Contrast"
3. Set the desired value.
Functional limitations
The system can be used only to a limited ex‐
tent in the following situations:
▷ In poor light.
Seite 197
Driver assistance systems Controls
197
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ In case of soiled cameras.
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the tailgate open.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
Gray hatched areas with symbol, e.g., open
door, in the camera image mark areas that are
currently not displayed.
Gray hatched areas without symbol, e.g., in
front of the vehicle, mark areas that are not
visible to the cameras.
System limits
Non-visible areas
Areas around the vehicle that are not visible
because of the viewing angle of the cameras,
are presented hatched in gray.
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Assistance functions also take into account
data of the PDC.
Observe the notes in the PDC Park Distance
Control chapter, refer to page 185.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti‐
mate the distance from the objects on the dis‐
play.
Malfunction
A camera malfunction is displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
A yellow symbol is displayed and the
recording range of the malfunctioning
camera is displayed in black on the
Control Display.
Parking assistant
Concept
The system supports parking in the following
situations:
▷ When parking parallel to the road.
▷ When reverse parking diagonally to the
road.
General information
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
steps:
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
The system calculates the best possible park‐
ing line.
While parking, the system assumes the follow‐
ing functions during the parking procedure:
▷ Steering.
▷ Accelerating and braking.
▷ Changing the gears.
Press and hold the park assistance button for
the duration of the parking procedure. Parking
is automatic.
Parking assistant Plus: the vehicle can be re‐
motely parked and driven out in reverse in the
Seite 198
Controls Driver assistance systems
198
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
case of suitable forward-parking spaces, refer
to page 203.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
NOTE
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
The safety information of the PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control, refer to page 185, applies in ad‐
dition.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
With the four side ultrasound sensors, arrows,
and the ultrasound sensors of the PDC in the
bumpers, the parking spaces are measured
and the distances to obstacles determined.
Functional requirements
Ultrasound sensors
To ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers.
▷ Keep sensors clean and unobstructed.
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
General information:
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Parallel parking to the road:
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Diagonal parking:
Seite 199
Driver assistance systems Controls
199
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle's
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
be estimated by the driver. Due to techni‐
cal limitations, the system is only able to
approximate the depth of diagonal parking
spaces.
For parking
▷ Doors and tailgate are closed.
▷ The parking brake is released.
▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button
Press park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but
not activated.
The system is activated.
Parking space search and system
status
▷ Symbol P, see arrow, on the vehicle depic‐
tion. Parking assistant is activated and
search for parking space active.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
lighted in color and a signal tone sounds.
Switch signal tone on/off, refer to
page 201.
▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is
clearly detected, the system automatically
adjusts the suitable parking method. In the
case of parking spaces suitable for parallel
and diagonal parking, a selection menu is
displayed. In this case, the desired parking
method must be selected manually.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
been taken over by system.
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Seite 200
Controls Driver assistance systems
200
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Parking using the parking assistant
Parking
1.
Press park assistance button or shift
into reverse gear to switch the parking as‐
sistant on, refer to page 200. Activate the
parking assistant, if needed.
Parking assistant is activated.
2. Drive by the row of parked vehicles at a
speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h
and at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the Control Display, refer to page 200.
3. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
Press and hold the park assistance button
for the duration of the parking procedure.
At the end of the parking procedure, the P
selector lever position is set.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ Release parking assistance button
during the parking procedure.
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
takes over steering.
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly
appear.
▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays
clearances that are too small.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
▷ When the park assistance button is re‐
leased.
▷ If the tailgate is open.
▷ If doors are open.
▷ When setting the parking brake.
▷ During acceleration.
▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for
an extended period while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resuming
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued, if needed.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
page 200, and follow the instructions on the
Control Display.
Switching off
The system can be switched off manually:
Press park assistance button.
Switching signal tone for suitable
parking spaces on/off
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Parking Assistant"
5. "Sound if parking space detected"
Seite 201
Driver assistance systems Controls
201
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Settings are stored.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
tance in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
parking space.
▷ With ditches or edges, e.g., an edge of a
port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.,
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g., from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ With small and low objects, e.g., boxes.
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷ With plants and bushes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs,
can move into the blind area of the sensors
before or after a continuous tone sounds.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter
of the vehicle is not taken into account by
the system.
Parking spaces that are not suitable may be
detected or suitable parking spaces may not
be detected at all.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked.
Seite 202
Controls Driver assistance systems
202
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Parking assistant Plus:
Remote Control Parking
Concept
The vehicle can be remotely parked and driven
out in reverse in the case of suitable forward-
parking spaces, e.g., a garage. The driver is not
in the vehicle, but controls the parking proce‐
dure responsibly from the outside using the
BMW display key, refer to page 59.
Stop the vehicles manually in the case of ob‐
stacles.
Using the BMW display key, the vehicle can be
moved by approx. 1.5 times the vehicle length.
The speed does not exceed 1.1 mph/1.8 km/h.
General information
The following systems are included in the sys‐
tem:
▷ Parking assistant, refer to page 198.
▷ BMW display key, refer to page 59.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to
page 185.
Button on the BMW display key: The button
on the side of the BMW display key must be
pressed and held for the duration of the park‐
ing procedure so that the vehicle can move.
Release the button for obstacles to manually
stop the vehicle. The vehicle stops with emer‐
gency braking.
If the ultrasound sensors detect obstacles in
the parking space or the end of the parking
space, the system automatically stops the ve‐
hicle as needed.
The headlight is switched on for the duration
of the procedure.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess traf‐
fic and parking situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to all
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Watch
traffic and parking situation closely and ac‐
tively intervene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Unauthorized persons, e.g., children, can
move the vehicle using the BMW display key
without anybody in the vehicle. There is a risk
of an accident. Protect the BMW display key
against unauthorized use.◀
NOTE
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Ultrasound sensors
With the four side ultrasound sensors, arrows,
and the ultrasound sensors of the PDC in the
bumpers, the parking spaces are measured
and the distances to obstacles determined.
Cameras
In addition to the ultrasonic sensors, the park‐
ing situation during Remote Control Parking is
detected using four cameras.
Seite 203
Driver assistance systems Controls
203
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Front camera.
Rearview camera.
One camera is located at the bottom of each
exterior mirror housing.
Functional requirements
Cameras and ultrasound sensors
To ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers.
▷ Keep sensors clean and unobstructed.
Clean them as needed.
▷ Keep camera lenses clean and unob‐
structed. Clean them as needed.
Suitable parking space
▷ It is possible to forward-park into the park‐
ing space in a straight, centered line.
▷ Width of the parking space: vehicle's own
width without exterior mirrors, plus approx.
1.3 ft/0.4 m on each side, arrow 1.
▷ Distance to parking space, max. 6.5 ft/2 m,
arrow 2.
▷ The driver with the BMW display key is
outside the vehicle during Remote Control
Parking.
Maximum distance to the vehicle:
▷ Behind the vehicle, approx. 10–13 ft/3–
4 m, arrow 3.
▷ To the side of the vehicle, approx.
5 ft/1.5 m, arrow 4.
▷ Uphill or downhill grades max. 5 %.
▷ No duplex garages.
Forward parking
Parking
While driving forward, the system applies mi‐
nor steering corrections as needed.
1.
Approach the parking space driving for‐
ward, centered and in a straight line. Stop
at a distance of maximum 6.5 ft/2 m.
2. Apply parking brake and switch drive-ready
state off using the Start/Stop button.
3. Have all occupants exit and close the
doors.
Seite 204
Controls Driver assistance systems
204
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
4. If necessary, switch on the display on the
BMW display key and lift display block, re‐
fer to page 59.
On the BMW display key, change to the
menu: "R/C parking"
5. Press and hold the button on the side of
the BMW display key for the duration of the
parking procedure.
6. Wait, until function readiness is indicated
on the display. Observe possible SMS text
messages.
7. "Engine Start": Touch button. The engine
starts.
8. To start the parking procedure: touch the
arrow symbol for "drive forward" on the
display.
Press and hold the button: the vehicle
moves as long as the button is pressed.
Release the button for obstacles within the
driving range to stop the vehicle.
For approach movements: touch the arrow
symbol for "drive backward".
9. At the end of the parking procedure, re‐
lease the button on the side of the BMW
display key. The vehicle stops.
"Engine Stop": Touch button. The engine
is switched off.
Lock the vehicle.
The parking brake is engaged and standby
state switched off.
Cancel, pause, continue the parking
procedure
To cancel or pause the parking procedure:
release button. The vehicle stops with emer‐
gency braking.
To resume the parking procedure: press the
button again within 30 seconds.
Driving out in reverse
Driving out of parking spaces
When driving in reverse, the vehicle drives
backward in a straight line without steering.
1. If necessary, switch on the display on the
BMW display key and lift display block, re‐
fer to page 59.
2. Unlock the vehicle.
3. On the BMW display key, change to the
menu: "R/C parking"
4. Press and hold the button on the side of
the BMW display key for the duration of the
parking procedure.
5. Wait, until function readiness is indicated
on the display. Observe possible SMS text
messages.
6. "Engine Start": Touch button. The engine
starts.
7. To start the reversing out procedure: touch
the arrow symbol for "drive backward" on
the display.
Press and hold the button: the vehicle
moves as long as the button is pressed.
Release the button for obstacles within the
driving range to stop the vehicle.
8. At the end of the reversing out procedure,
release the button on the side of the BMW
display key. The vehicle stops.
9. "Engine Stop": Touch button. The engine
is switched off.
The parking brake is engaged and drive-
ready state switched off.
Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
Cancel, pause, continue the parking
procedure
To cancel or pause the parking procedure:
release button. The vehicle stops with emer‐
gency braking.
To resume the parking procedure: press the
button again within 30 seconds.
Seite 205
Driver assistance systems Controls
205
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Messages on the BMW display key
The symbol indicates pending system
messages. Tapping on the symbol dis‐
plays the messages.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
tance in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
parking space.
▷ With ditches or edges, e.g., an edge of a
port.
Function restrictions due to radio
interference
In the case of radio interference, function re‐
strictions may occur, refer to page 62, during
Remote Control Parking with the BMW display
key.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.,
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g., from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ With small and low objects, e.g., boxes.
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷ With plants and bushes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs,
can move into the blind area of the sensors
before or after a continuous tone sounds.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter
of the vehicle is not taken into account by
the system.
Seite 206
Controls Driver assistance systems
206
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Parking spaces that are not suitable may be
detected or suitable parking spaces may not
be detected at all.
Crossing traffic warning
Concept
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
At blind driveways or when driving out of diag‐
onal parking spaces, approaching cross traffic
is detected sooner by the system than is pos‐
sible from the driver's seat.
The system indicates approaching traffic.
The respective display is called up on the Con‐
trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the
lamp in the exterior mirror may flash.
With the respective equipment variant, the
traffic area in front of the vehicle is monitored
as well. Two additional radar sensors are lo‐
cated in the front bumpers.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
With the respective equipment variant, there
are two additional radar sensors in the front
bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Seite 207
Driver assistance systems Controls
207
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Switching on/off
Activating/deactivating the system
1.
Press park assistance button.
2. Move the controller to the left.
3. "Settings"
4. "Cross traffic alert"
5. "Cross traffic alert"
Switching on automatically
If the system is activated on the Control Dis‐
play, it is automatically switched on as soon as
PDC or Panorama View is active and a gear is
engaged.
The rear system is switched on in selector
lever position R.
With the respective equipment, the front sys‐
tem is switched on in selector lever position D.
Switching off automatically
The system is automatically switched off in the
following situations:
▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed.
▷ With the steering and lane control assistant
active: when a certain driving distance is
exceeded.
▷ With an active parking operation of the
parking assistant.
WARNING
Lamp in the exterior mirror
The lamp in the exterior mirror flashes if vehi‐
cles are detected by the rear sensors and your
own vehicle is moving backwards.
Display in the PDC view
The respective boundary area in the PDC view
flashes red, if vehicles are detected by the sen‐
sors.
Display in the camera view
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the
camera view flashes red, if vehicles are de‐
tected by the sensors.
Seite 208
Controls Driver assistance systems
208
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the front or rear
edge of your own vehicle.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning
signal sounds if your own vehicle moves into
the respective direction.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is
very high.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ If crossing objects move at a very slow
speed.
▷ If other objects are in the capture range of
the sensors, that hide cross traffic.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Seite 209
Driver assistance systems Controls
209
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Air suspension
Concept
Air suspension ensures best possible driving
comfort under all load conditions. Due to a var‐
iable adjustment of the front and rear axles, the
damping is adjusted to the vehicle state.
General information
In the case of an uneven road surface, the ve‐
hicle level can be elevated to increase ground
clearance.
▷ Normal level, for normal road surface.
▷ Raised level, when the road surface is poor.
In the SPORT driving mode, refer to page 116,
or at higher speeds, the vehicle lowers itself.
Safety information
WARNING
When lowering the vehicle, body parts
can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. When
lowering the vehicle, make sure that the areas
of movement under the vehicle and under the
wheel housing are free.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Level adjustment
Adjusting the level manually
Press button.
In the low speed range, the vehicle is raised to
the raised level with a press of the button.
Starting at a speed of approx. 20 mph/35 km/h
the vehicle lowers itself automatically to the
normal level.
Display
▷ LED off: normal level.
▷ LED flashes: level is being adjusted.
▷ LED lit: raised level.
▷ LED flashes rapidly: level adjustment not
possible.
System limits
With several manual level changes one after
another, the system will switch itself off, if nec‐
essary. The rapidly flashing LED on the button
indicates that the system is temporarily un‐
available.
Tire change
Before a tire change, deactivate the system:
Seite 210
Controls Driving comfort
210
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Press button and hold for approx. 7 sec‐
onds, then release. The LED flashes rap‐
idly.
To activate system:
The system is activated again automatically
when you drive away.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed. The
system is impaired. Vehicle handling may be
altered and driving comfort may be noticeably
reduced. Have the system checked.
Long periods when vehicle is parked
During long periods when the vehicle is
parked, it can lower itself. This is not a mal‐
function.
Dynamic Damping Control
Concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
This enhances the driving dynamics and driv‐
ing comfort depending on the road surface
condition and driving style.
General information
The system offers several different damping
settings.
These are assigned to the different driving
modes of the Driving Dynamics Control, refer
to page 116.
Driving mode Damper tuning
COMFORT PLUS comfortable
SPORT firm
COMFORT/ECO PRO balanced out
Executive Drive Pro
Concept
Executive Drive Pro is an actively controlled
chassis. The system increases driving comfort
and minimizes the lateral tilt when driving
around curves.
General information
Active control uses the available information,
e.g., from the navigation system, the driving
style analysis, and the camera-based look-
ahead data. In particular in the ADAPTIVE driv‐
ing mode, refer to page 118, this information is
used to influence the Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol and the active roll stabilization, refer to
page 211, control. This further increases both
the agility of the vehicle as well as the lane sta‐
bility.
Active roll stabilization
Concept
The system reduces the lateral inclination of
the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in
curves or during quick evasive maneuvers.
The lateral inclination of the vehicle is bal‐
anced out by permanent adjustment on the
front and rear axles. The vehicle is thus always
stabilized.
Agility and driving comfort are increased under
all driving conditions.
General information
The system offers several different tunings.
These are assigned to the different driving
modes of the Driving Dynamics Control, refer
to page 116.
Driving mode Tuning
COMFORT/COMFORT PLUS comfortable
SPORT firm
Seite 211
Driving comfort Controls
211
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Automatic climate control
Overview
Buttons in the center console
Button Function
Temperature, refer to
page 213.
Climate control operation, refer
to page 213.
Maximum cooling, refer to
page 213.
AUTO program, refer to
page 213.
Button Function
Recirculated-air mode, refer to
page 214.
Air flow, manual, refer to
page 215.
Air distribution, manual, refer
to page 215.
SYNC program, refer to
page 215.
Defrost and defog window, re‐
fer to page 215.
Rear window defroster, refer to
page 216.
Active seat ventilation, refer to
page 96.
Seat heating, refer to page 95.
Ambient air package, refer to
page 221.
Climate control functions in detail
Switching on/off
Switching on
Press any button except:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of air flow button.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Seat ventilation.
▷ SYNC program.
Switching off
▷ Complete system:
Seite 212
Controls Climate control
212
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Press and hold the left button on
the driver's side until the control
panel switches off.
▷ On the front passenger side:
Press and hold the left button on
the front passenger side.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed,
by using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐
pacity, and then keeps it constant.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between
different temperature settings.
Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Display
Symbol is displayed permanently on the
display of the automatic climate control.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the vehicle's interior will be cooled
and dehumidified and, depending on the tem‐
perature setting, warmed again.
The vehicle's interior can only be cooled with
the drive-ready state switched on.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
tioning switched on.
Air conditioning is switched on with the engine
running.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when drive-
ready state is switched on.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops and collects un‐
derneath the vehicle.
Maximum cooling
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
optimum air flow and recirculated-air mode
with the drive-ready state switched on.
General information
The function is available with external temper‐
atures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the sys‐
tem switched on.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
Adjust air flow on the driver's side with the pro‐
gram active.
AUTO program
Concept
Depending on the selected temperature, the
intensity of the AUTO program, and outside in‐
fluences, the air is directed to the windshield,
side windows, upper body, and into the floor
area.
Seite 213
Climate control Controls
213
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on.
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically.
The cooling function, refer to page 213, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
The AUTO program is switched off automati‐
cally, when manual air distribution is set.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Automatic recirculated-air control
AUC
Concept
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC
recognizes odors or pollutants in the outside
air. The outside air supply is shut off and the
interior air is recirculated.
General information
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pol‐
lutants in the outside air and controls the shut-
off automatically.
If the system is deactivated, outside air contin‐
uously flows into the vehicle's interior.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the vehicle's interior deteriorates and
the fogging of the windows increases.
Switching on/off
Press buttons.
The LED is illuminated with the sys‐
tem switched on.
If there is window condensation, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the button on
the driver's side to utilize the condensation
sensor. Make sure that air can flow to the
windshield.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Automatic air recirculation"
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on: the supply of outside air is perma‐
nently shut off.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the vehicle's interior deteriorates and
the fogging of the windows increases.
If there is window condensation,
switch off the recirculated-air mode
and press the button on the driver's side to uti‐
lize the condensation sensor. Make sure that
air can flow to the windshield.
Seite 214
Controls Climate control
214
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Air flow, manual
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
General information
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Operation
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Manual air distribution
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows and floor area.
▷ Windows.
▷ Windows and upper body.
▷ Upper body region.
The selected air distribution is shown on the
display of the automatic climate control.
If there is window condensation, press
the button on the driver's side to uti‐
lize the condensation sensor.
SYNC program
Concept
The following settings of the driver's side can
be transferred to the front-passenger side and
the rear:
▷ Temperature.
▷ Air flow.
▷ Air distribution.
▷ AUTO program.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the SYNC
program switched on.
The program is switched off automatically if
the settings on the front passenger side or in
the rear are changed.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win‐
dows.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the sys‐
tem switched on.
Point the side vents towards the side windows,
as needed.
The air flow can be adjusted manually with the
system switched on.
If there is window condensation, press
the button on the driver's side or
Seite 215
Climate control Controls
215
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
switch on air conditioning to utilize the con‐
densation sensor.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The function is available with the en‐
gine running.
The rear window defroster switches off auto‐
matically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
This combined filter should be replaced during
maintenance, refer to page 296, of the vehicle.
Ventilation
Concept
The air flow directions can be individually ad‐
justed.
Adjusting the ventilation
The air flow directions can be adjusted for di‐
rect or indirect ventilation.
Direct ventilation
The air flow is directly pointed onto the person.
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depend‐
ing on the adjusted temperature.
Indirect ventilation
If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air is
directly routed into the vehicle's interior.
Indirect ventilation can also be adjusted on the
Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Indirect ventilation"
Front ventilation
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 2.
▷ Touch sensor or thumbwheel to vary the
ventilation temperature, arrow 3.
With touch sensor, push the marking in the
desired direction:
▷ Toward blue: colder.
▷ Toward red: warmer.
This does not change the set interior tem‐
perature for the driver and front passenger.
Ventilation in rear, center
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
Seite 216
Controls Climate control
216
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 2.
Lateral ventilation
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 2.
Rear automatic climate
control
Overview
1 Temperature
2 AUTO program
3 Air distribution, manual
4 Air flow, AUTO intensity
5 Display
6 Maximum cooling
7 Seat heating 95
8 Active seat ventilation 96
Climate control functions in detail
Switching on/off
Via iDrive
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Rear climate"
The rear automatic climate control is not ready
for operation if the automatic climate control is
switched off or if the function for defrosting the
windows and removing condensation is active.
Using the button: switching on
Press any button except:
▷ Left side of air flow button.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Seat ventilation.
Using the button: switching off
Press and hold the left side of the but‐
ton.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed,
by using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐
pacity, and then keeps it constant.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between
different temperature settings.
Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Seite 217
Climate control Controls
217
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Display
Symbol is displayed permanently on the
display of the automatic climate control.
Operation is also possible using BMW Touch
Command.
Maximum cooling
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
optimum air flow and recirculated-air mode
with the drive-ready state switched on.
General information
The function is available with external temper‐
atures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the sys‐
tem switched on.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
Operation is also possible using BMW Touch
Command.
AUTO program
Concept
Depending on the selected temperature, the
AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air
is directed to the upper body and into the floor
area.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on.
Air flow, air distribution, and temperature are
controlled automatically:
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed:
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Air flow, manual
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
General information
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Operation
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
Operation is also possible using BMW Touch
Command.
Manual air distribution
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
Seite 218
Controls Climate control
218
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Operation is also possible using BMW Touch
Command.
Climate control operation on the
roofliner
Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Air flow
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
LEDs indicate the intensity of the air supply.
The air flow may be reduced automatically to
save battery power.
Ventilation
Thumbwheel for changing the air flow direc‐
tion.
Parked-vehicle ventilation
Concept
General information
The system can be switched on and off di‐
rectly or via a pre-set departure time.
The activation time is determined based on the
external temperature. The system promptly
switches on before the selected departure
time.
Functional requirements
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
and not in drive-ready state.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
If parked-vehicle ventilation/heating is
switched on, the vehicle battery will be dis‐
charged. Thus, limit the maximum activa‐
tion time to save the vehicle battery. The
system will be available again after engine
starting and/or a short trip.
▷ Parked-vehicle heating: the fuel tank ca‐
pacity is sufficient.
The parked-vehicle heating function can
be limited if the fuel tank is low and the ve‐
hicle is parked in an inclined position.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
There are different ways to switch the system
on or off.
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time. The system continues
to run for some time after being switched off.
Using the button
When the vehicle is in standby state, the sys‐
tem can be switched on or off via the auto‐
matic climate control buttons.
Press any button except:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of air flow button.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Seat ventilation.
▷ SYNC program.
Seite 219
Climate control Controls
219
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Via iDrive
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Comfort ventilation" or "Comfort heating/
ventilation"
5. "Activate now"
Via BMW display key
Switching on directly
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Climate setting"
3. Tap on the or symbol.
4. "Activate now"
5. "Start"
Switching off directly
1.
Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Climate setting"
3. Tap on the or symbol.
4. "Stop"
Display
symbol on the automatic climate control in‐
dicates the system is switched on.
REST is displayed on the automatic climate
control. The residual engine heat is used.
Departure time
Different departure times can be adjusted to
ensure a comfortable interior temperature in
the vehicle at the time of departure.
▷ One-time departure time: the time can be
set.
The system is switched on once.
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week can be set.
On the desired weekdays, the system will
be switched on promptly before the set de‐
parture time.
The departure time is preselected in two
steps:
▷ Set departure times.
▷ Activate departure times.
Setting the departure time
Via iDrive
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Comfort ventilation" or "Comfort heating/
ventilation"
5. Select the desired departure time.
6. Set the departure time.
7. Select day of the week, if needed.
Via BMW display key
1.
Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Climate setting"
3. Tap on the or symbol.
4. Select the desired departure time.
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
7. "OK"
Activating the departure time
Functional requirement
If a departure time is to influence the switching
on of parked-vehicle ventilation, the respective
departure time must be activated first.
Via iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
Seite 220
Controls Climate control
220
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Comfort ventilation" or "Comfort heating/
ventilation"
5. "For departure time"
6. Activate the desired departure time.
, The symbol on the automatic climate
control signals an activated departure time
Via BMW display key
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Climate setting"
3. Tap on the or symbol.
4. Tap on symbol.
5. Activate the desired departure time.
The symbol on the automatic climate
control signals an activated departure time.
Ambient air package
Concept
The Ambient Air Package can be used to clean
and scent the interior air with high-quality fra‐
grances.
Two different fragrances can be selected in the
vehicle. A variety of other fragrances is possi‐
ble by replacing the fragrance cartridges.
Ionization is used to clean the air from sus‐
pended particles. Together with the selected
fragrance, ionization contributes to well-being
and relaxation while driving.
General information
The following criteria can influence the per‐
ception of scents in the vehicle interior:
▷ Automatic climate control settings.
▷ Temperature and air humidity.
▷ Time of day and season.
▷ Physical condition of the vehicle occu‐
pants, e.g., fatigue.
BMW recommends the use of genuine BMW
fragrance cartridges.
The genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not
suitable for refilling. When a cartridge is empty,
replace it with a new fragrance cartridge.
Safety information
WARNING
Refilled genuine BMW fragrance car‐
tridges can cause the emission of harmful sub‐
stances, malfunctions, and damage to the sys‐
tem. There is a risk of injury or risk of property
damage. Do not refill genuine fragrance car‐
tridges. When a cartridge is empty, replace it
with a new fragrance cartridge.◀
Ionization
Concept
Ionization cleans the vehicle's interior air of
suspended particles.
Switching on/off
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Ionization"
The climate control display indicates that ioni‐
zation is switched on.
Operation is also possible using BMW Touch
Command.
Fragrancing
General information
Fragrancing is done at intervals in order to
avoid a habituation effect.
Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow
switching between the fragrances.
Seite 221
Climate control Controls
221
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
The fragrance cartridges are located in the
glove compartment.
Overview
Button in the center console
Fragrancing
Functional requirements
▷ Fragrance cartridges are sufficiently filled.
▷ Interior temperature between 41 ℉/+5 ℃
and 104 ℉/+40 ℃.
Selecting the fragrance
Two different fragrances can be selected in the
vehicle.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Fragrance"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Switching fragrancing on/off,
adjusting intensity
Using the button
Press button once for each intensity
level.
Highest intensity if three bars are shown on
the climate control display.
Fragrancing is switched off if no bars are dis‐
played.
Via iDrive
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Fragrance"
6. "Level"
7. Select the desired setting.
About BMW Touch Command
Operation is also possible using BMW Touch
Command.
Display
General information
With operation via button, the menu of the Am‐
bient Air Package can be displayed on the
Control Display automatically.
Settings
Further settings can be adjusted.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Fragrance"
6. "Show fragrance setting"
The menu is shown on the Control Display.
Fragrance cartridge filling level
The illustrations on the Control Display show
the actual filling level of the fragrance car‐
tridges.
Seite 222
Controls Climate control
222
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Fragrance"
The fill level of the current fragrance is dis‐
played.
6. Select the desired setting.
When an empty fragrance cartridge is indi‐
cated, the cartridge still contains a fluid carry‐
ing the fragrance. However, it is not sufficient
for fragrancing.
When a fragrance cartridge requires replace‐
ment, a Check Control message is displayed
Inserting fragrance cartridges
The fragrance cartridges are located in the
glove compartment.
1.
Open the glove compartment, refer to
page 235.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge
holder.
The cartridge holder slides down.
3. Remove the cover of the fragrance car‐
tridge. Hold the cover on the top to slide it
from the fragrance cartridge.
4. Insert the removed cover on the back side
of the fragrance cartridge.
5. Position fragrance cartridge such that the
chip faces away from the cartridge holder.
Seite 223
Climate control Controls
223
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
6. Insert the fragrance cartridge without pres‐
sure into the cartridge holder. The car‐
tridge snaps lightly into place.
7. Push the cartridge holder up, until it en‐
gages.
Make sure that no objects press against
the cartridge holder from below, otherwise
the function of the ambient air package
could be impacted.
8. Close the glove compartment.
Removing the fragrance cartridge
The fragrance cartridges are located in the
glove compartment.
1.
Open the glove compartment, refer to
page 235.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge
holder.
The cartridge holder slides down.
3. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the
holder.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fra‐
grance indicated on the Control Display.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra‐
grance indicated on the Control Display.
4. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the
holder.
Empty fragrance cartridges can be
taken to a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop for recycling.
Seite 224
Controls Climate control
224
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Universal Integrated Remote
Control
Concept
The Universal Integrated Remote Control can
operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled
systems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems.
General information
The Universal Integrated Remote Control re‐
places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.
To operate the remote control, the buttons on
the interior mirror must be programmed with
the desired functions. The hand-held transmit‐
ter for the particular system is required in order
to program the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the ga‐
rage door, using the integrated universal re‐
mote control. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐
tem to be controlled, the system is
generally compatible with the Universal
Integrated Remote Control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Control elements on the interior mirror
▷ Buttons, arrow 1.
▷ LED, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
1.
Turn on standby state.
2. Initial setup:
Seite 225
Interior equipment Controls
225
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Press and hold the left and right buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
proximately 10 seconds until the LED
flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro‐
gramming of the buttons on the interior
mirror.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐
grammed. The LED flashes orange.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to
8 cm away from the buttons of the interior
mirror. The required distance depends on
the hand-held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter. The
LED on the interior mirror will begin flash‐
ing orange slowly.
6. As soon as the LED flashes green more
rapidly or lights up continuously, release
the button. Green light indicates that the
button on the interior mirror has been pro‐
grammed. Faster green flashing indicates
that it is a rolling code wireless system.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐
tween the interior mirror and the hand-held
transmitter and repeat the step. Several
more attempts at different distances may
be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds be‐
tween attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
7.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐
rior mirror buttons.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the
system to be controlled features a rolling code
radio system.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior mirror
longer. If the LED on the interior mirror starts
flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for
2 seconds, the system features a rolling code
radio system. Flashing and continuous illumi‐
nation of the LED will repeat for approximately
20 seconds.
For systems with a rolling code radio system,
the universal remote control and the system
also have to be synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
Synchronizing the universal remote control
with the system:
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
and then release it. If necessary, repeat this
step up to three times in order to finish
synchronization. Once synchronization is
complete, the programmed function will be
carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Turn on standby state.
2. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐
grammed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
prox. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
buttons of the interior mirror. The required
Seite 226
Controls Interior equipment
226
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
distance depends on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior mirror LED flashes more rapidly or
lights up continuously. The LED flashing
more rapidly or being continuously lit up in‐
dicates that the button on the interior mir‐
ror has been programmed. The system can
then be controlled by the button on the in‐
terior mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
Operation
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the ga‐
rage door, using the integrated universal re‐
mote control. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior mirror
while the drive-ready or standby state is
switched on. To do this, hold down the button
within receiving range of the system until the
function is activated. The interior mirror LED
stays lit while the wireless signal is being
transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the left and right button on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes rap‐
idly green. All stored functions will be deleted.
The functions cannot be deleted individually.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding out
1.
Fold the sun visor down.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to
the side.
3. Move it back to the desired position.
Folding up
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun
visor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on.
Seite 227
Interior equipment Controls
227
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Ashtray
Front center console
Opening
1. Push the cover forward until it engages be‐
hind the cup holders.
2. Push the cover forward again until it en‐
gages behind the storage compartment.
3. Fold the cover upward.
Emptying
Grasp the insert on the side and pull it out.
Rear door
Opening
Press on the cover.
Emptying
Grasp the insert on the side and remove it.
Lighter
Safety information
WARNING
Contact with hot heating elements or the
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is a risk of fire
and injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter by its
handle. Make sure that children do not use the
cigarette lighter and do not burn themselves,
e.g., by carrying the remote control with you
when exiting the vehicle.◀
Seite 228
Controls Interior equipment
228
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter
or socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Front center console
Opening
1. Push the cover forward until it engages be‐
hind the cup holders.
2. Push the cover forward again until it en‐
gages behind the storage compartment.
The cigarette lighter is located between the
cup holders.
Rear center console
Without rear console: opening and
closing
Press cover to open.
The cigarette lighter is on the right side.
To close the cover, tap it again.
With rear console: opening and
closing
Push the cover backward until it engages.
The cigarette lighter is located between the
cup holders.
Tap the cover on the handle bar to close it.
Seite 229
Interior equipment Controls
229
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Operation
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Sockets
Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment when standby and drive-
ready state are switched on.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter
or socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Front center armrest
The center armrest contains a socket.
Front center console
Push the cover forward until it engages behind
the cup holders.
A socket is located between the cup holders.
Rear center console
Without rear console: opening and
closing
Press cover to open.
The rear center console contains two sockets.
To close the cover, tap it again.
Seite 230
Controls Interior equipment
230
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
With rear console: opening and
closing
Push the cover backward until it engages.
A socket is located between the cup holders.
Tap the cover on the handle bar to close it.
With rear console: rear center armrest
The center armrest contains a socket.
In the cargo area
A socket is located on the right side in the
cargo area. Fold open the cover.
USB interface
General information
Observe the information regarding the con‐
nection of mobile devices to the USB interface
in the section on USB connections, refer to
page 45.
In the center armrest
A USB interface is located in the center arm‐
rest.
Seite 231
Interior equipment Controls
231
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
In the center console
1. Push the cover forward until it engages be‐
hind the cup holders.
2. Push the cover forward again until it en‐
gages behind the storage compartment.
A USB interface is located in the center con‐
sole.
Folding table in the rear
General information
There is a folding table in the center armrest of
the rear console.
Safety information
WARNING
A folded-out folding table protrudes into
the vehicle's interior and, in case of accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers can cause inju‐
ries. Objects on the table can be thrown
around the vehicle's interior while driving.
There is a risk of injury. Do not unfold or use
folding table while driving.◀
Folding open the folding table
1. Open the center armrest. Press the button
for this purpose.
2. Grasp the folding table at the rear and fold
forward in the center armrest.
3. Pull the folding table from the center arm‐
rest.
4. Close the cover of the center armrest.
5. Fold the folding table down and adjust as
needed.
Folding in the folding table
Proceed in reverse order to fold in the folding
table.
Seite 232
Controls Interior equipment
232
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Rear cooler
Safety information
WARNING
The cover of the opened cooler pro‐
trudes into the vehicle's interior. Injuries can
occur in the event of an accident, braking or
evasive maneuver. The content of the cooler
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior and in‐
jure occupants. There is a risk of injury. Close
the cooler after use when driving.◀
NOTE
If the cooler is horizontal, the compressor
oil spreads in the cooling circuit. There is a risk
of property damage. Place the cooler vertically
for at least one hour prior to operation so that
the oil can return into the compressor.◀
Opening
1.
Fold down the center armrest, refer to
page 237.
2. Opening the through-loading system, refer
to page 242.
3. Pull on the handle and fold the cover for‐
ward.
Switching on
The cooler can be operated at two levels.
1.
Turn on standby state.
2.
Press button once for each cooling
level.
The highest cooling power is active when
two LEDs are lit.
If the cooler was switched on the last time
standby state was switched off, it will be
switched on automatically the next time
standby state is switched on.
Switching off
Press button repeatedly until the LEDs go out.
Removing
1. Fold the cover away to the side.
2. Pull on the rear handle.
3. Pull cooler backward and remove it.
4. Fold the cover back.
Seite 233
Interior equipment Controls
233
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Installing
1. Open the cover.
2. Slide the cooler into the guide rail, until it
stops.
3. Fold the cover back and secure to cooler.
Malfunction
Message
One of the LEDs flashes.
The cooler cannot be switched on or switches
off, e.g., when the cooling system overheats or
if the battery voltage is low.
Rectifying the problem
1. If necessary, allow the refrigerator cooling
system to cool down.
2. Start the engine.
3. Switch on cooler.
If the LED flashes even after a short time, have
the cooler checked.
Seite 234
Controls Interior equipment
234
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
NOTE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 235.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,
refer to page 236.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 236.
▷ Storage compartment on the center con‐
sole, refer to page 236.
▷ Center armrest, refer to page 237.
▷ Storage compartment in the rear, refer to
page 237.
▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
console, refer to page 236.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front
seats.
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
the glove compartment can be thrown into the
vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
of an accident or during braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Seite 235
Storage compartments Controls
235
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over without the
integrated key, e.g., when the vehicle is parked
by valet parking.
Driver's side
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
the glove compartment can be thrown into the
vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
of an accident or during braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Compartments in the doors
WARNING
Breakable objects, e.g., glass bottles, can
break in the event of an accident. Broken glass
can be scattered in the vehicle's interior. There
is a risk of injury. Do not stow any breakable
objects in the vehicle's interior.◀
Storage compartment in the
center console
Opening
1.
Push the cover forward until it engages be‐
hind the cup holders.
2. Push the cover forward again until it en‐
gages behind the storage compartment.
Closing
1.
Touch the cover on the handle bar. The
cover closes up to the cup holders.
2. Tap the cover again. The cover closes fully.
Storage compartment in the
rear center console
The rear center console contains a storage
compartment.
Seite 236
Controls Storage compartments
236
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Storage compartment in the
rear
General information
A storage compartment is located behind the
cover between the backrests.
Opening
Push the cover up until it engages.
Closing
Push the cover up again.
The cover slides down.
Center armrest
Front
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Opening
Press button.
Closing
Press cover down until it engages.
Rear
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Folding down
Reach into the recess and fold the center arm‐
rest forward.
Opening
Depending on the equipment, proceed as fol‐
lows:
Seite 237
Storage compartments Controls
237
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Press button, arrow 1, and fold the cover up,
arrow 2.
Press button, arrow 1, and fold the cover up,
arrow 2.
Press button.
Closing
Press cover down until it engages.
Cup holders
Safety information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injury in the event of an
accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport
hot beverages. Do not force objects into the
cup holder.◀
Front
Opening
Push the cover forward until it engages behind
the cup holders.
Two cup holders are located in the center con‐
sole.
Closing
Touch the cover on the handle bar. The cover
closes.
Seite 238
Controls Storage compartments
238
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Rear
Safety information
NOTE
With an open cup holder, the center arm‐
rest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk
of property damage. Press back the covers be‐
fore the center armrest is folded up.◀
Without rear console: opening and
closing
Opening
Press button.
Closing
Push back the cup holder.
With rear console: opening and
closing
Opening
Push the cover backward until it engages.
Closing
Touch the cover on the handle bar. The cover
closes.
Clothes hooks
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks
can obstruct the view while driving. There is a
risk of an accident. When suspending clothing
articles from the hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g., clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.◀
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear and on the door pillar in the
rear.
Seite 239
Storage compartments Controls
239
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Cargo area
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Loading
Safety information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them, and cause a sudden drop in tire
inflation pressure. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Pay attention to the permitted load ca‐
pacity of the tires and never exceed the per‐
mitted gross weight.◀
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the vehicle's interior, e.g., in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.◀
NOTE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is a risk of property damage. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀
Determining the load limit
1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the vehicle
and unstable driving situations may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
YYY pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
E.g., if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs
and there will be four 150 lbs passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs:
1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Seite 240
Controls Cargo area
240
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as
possible, directly behind and at the bottom
of the rear passenger seat backrests.
When the rear seat is not occupied, secure
each of the outer safety belts in the oppo‐
site buckle.
▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with
ratchet straps or with a cargo net or draw
straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Attach cargo straps, cargo nets, retaining
straps or draw straps to the lashing eyes in
the cargo area, refer to page 241.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
To secure the cargo there are lashing eyes in
the cargo area.
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Multi-function hook
General information
A multi-function hook is located on the left
side in the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
Improper use of the multi-function hooks
can lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g., shopping bags,
from the multi-function hooks. Only transport
heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been
appropriately secured.◀
Seite 241
Cargo area Controls
241
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Folding down
Press on the multi-function hook and turn until
it engages.
Storage compartment on the right
side
A storage compartment is available on the
right side of the cargo area.
Left side storage compartment
General information
A storage compartment is located on the left
side in the cargo area.
Opening
Pull the handle.
Storage compartment below cargo
floor panel
There is a storage compartment under the
cargo floor panel.
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
Through-loading system
Concept
The through-loading system allows the trans‐
port of long objects, such as skies.
Without comfort seats: opening
through-loading
1.
Fold down the center armrest.
2. Remove flap.
3. Pull handle, arrow 1, down and fold panel
forward, arrow 2.
Seite 242
Controls Cargo area
242
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
With comfort seats: opening through-
loading
Without rear console
1. Fold down the center armrest.
2. Pull on the loop.
With rear console
1.
Push the cover up until it engages.
2. Pull on the loop.
With emergency wheel:
enlarging the cargo area
Concept
The emergency wheel and any related compo‐
nents can be temporarily removed to enlarged
the cargo area.
Removing the emergency wheel and
the storage compartments
1. Remove the cargo floor panel. To do this,
pull the cargo floor panel upward directly
behind the rear backrests.
2. Open the ratchet strap.
3. Remove the tool holder.
4. Remove the emergency wheel from the
storage well.
5. Loosen the ratchet strap from the lashing
eyes.
Seite 243
Cargo area Controls
243
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
6. Remove the storage compartment.
7. Remove the storage well
8. Insert the cargo floor panel.
Inserting the emergency wheel and
the storage compartments
Proceed in reverse order to insert the emer‐
gency wheel and the storage compartments.
Ski and snowboard bag
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the cargo area.
Follow the installation and owner's manual in‐
cluded in the protective jacket.
If equipped with emergency wheel: remove the
emergency wheel from the vehicle to mount
the ski and snowboard bag.
Seite 244
Controls Cargo area
244
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Seite 245
Cargo area Controls
245
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐
other (break-in time).
The following instructions will help you to ach‐
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐
trol, refer to page 116.
Safety information
WARNING
Due to new parts and components,
safety and driver assistance systems can react
with a delay. There is a risk of an accident. Af‐
ter installing new parts or with a new vehicle,
drive conservatively and intervene early if nec‐
essary. Observe the break-in procedures of
the respective parts and components.◀
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Following part replacement
Observe the break-in procedures again, if
components mentioned above are replaced.
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
cle and can endanger occupants and other
traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
the vehicle interior. There is a risk of injury or
risk of property damage. Do not drive with the
tailgate open.◀
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
Seite 248
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
248
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the vehicle body,
e.g., caused by the exhaust gas system. If
combustible materials, such as leaves or grass,
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
gas system, these materials can ignite. There
is a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Do
not remove the heat shields installed and never
apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact
with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle
or during parking. Do not touch the hot ex‐
haust system.◀
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
can influence one another. There is radiation
due to the transmission operations of mobile
phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐
erty damage. If possible, in the vehicle's inte‐
rior use only mobile phones with direct con‐
nections to an exterior antenna in order to
exclude mutual interference and deflect the ra‐
diation from the vehicle's interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
NOTE
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
transmission. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. When driving through water, do not ex‐
ceed the maximum indicated water level and
the maximum speed for driving through wa‐
ter.◀
When driving through water, observe the fol‐
lowing:
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Braking safely
General information
The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ard feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that
require such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
fort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
In certain braking situations, the perforated
brake discs can emit functional noises. How‐
ever, this has no effect on the performance and
operational reliability of the brake.
Objects in the area around the pedals
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
Seite 249
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
249
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, e.g., for cleaning.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
gently press the brake pedal every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other traffic.
The heat generated during braking dries brake
discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk
of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress
on the brake system.◀
WARNING
In idle state or with the engine switched
off, safety-relevant functions, e.g., engine
braking effect, braking force boost and steer‐
ing assistance, are restricted or not available at
all. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive
in idle state or with the engine switched off.◀
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking effort. Other‐
wise, the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if needed.
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are increased by the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally this cannot be corrected.
Condensation water under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops and collects un‐
derneath the vehicle.
Flag bracket
Safety information
NOTE
At high speeds, a mounted flag can
cause damage to the vehicle, the flag bracket,
and the flag itself. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph /
130 km/h. Remove flag before trips at high
speeds.◀
Seite 250
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
250
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Overview
The flag bracket is located on the side of the
vehicle.
Mounting
1.
Remove the protective cap.
2. Insert flag horizontally.
3. Turn the flag clockwise by 90° to lock the
flag.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
General information
Installation only possible in roof drip rail with
flaps. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Roof drip rail with flaps
The anchorage points are located in the roof
drip rail above the doors.
Fold the cover outward.
Mounting
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Magnetic roof-mounted luggage racks
Because of the aluminum roof, magnetic roof-
mounted luggage racks cannot be used.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass
sunroof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., using
ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
This wear is not covered by the warranty. The
Seite 251
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
251
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
vehicle is not designed for motorsports com‐
petitive use.
Seite 252
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
252
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies
for the reduction of fuel consumption and
emission values.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐
erate driving style and regular maintenance,
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or rear
luggage racks which are no longer required fol‐
lowing use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
raises fuel consumption.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐
sumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold
engine up to operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Seite 253
Saving fuel Driving tips
253
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Avoid high engine speeds
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift
indicator, refer to page 126.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Concept
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle au‐
tomatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐
onds of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
increase fuel consumption, especially in city
and stop-and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
The ECO PRO driving mode supports the en‐
ergy conserving use of comfort features.
These functions are automatically deactivated
partially or completely.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to ach‐
ieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
BMW recommends that maintenance work be
performed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
For information on the BMW Maintenance
System, refer to page 296.
ECO PRO
Concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
gine control and comfort features, e.g., the cli‐
mate control output, are adjusted.
Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
matically decoupled from the transmission in
the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐
tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐
duce fuel consumption. Selector lever position
D remains engaged.
In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO
PRO tips, are displayed to assist with an opti‐
mized fuel consumption driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
Seite 254
Driving tips Saving fuel
254
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
General information
The system includes the following
EfficientDynamics functions and
EfficientDynamics displays:
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 256.
▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to
page 256.
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to
page 255.
▷ ECO PRO coasting driving condition, refer
to page 257.
▷ ECO PRO driving style analysis, refer to
page 258.
Overview
Button
Activating ECO PRO
Press button. ECO PRO is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
Opening via the Driving Dynamics
Control
1.
Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
Opening via iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Driving Experience Control"
4. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
ECO PRO notes
▷ Activate ECO PRO tips:
"ECO PRO tips"
ECO PRO tips are displayed.
▷ Activate the ECO PRO limit:
"ECO PRO speed warning"
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed
of the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
▷ Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed:
"Tip at:"
Select the desired speed.
Activating ECO PRO functions
The following ECO PRO functions can be acti‐
vated:
▷ "Coasting"
▷ "ECO PRO seat climate control"
▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ "ECO PRO sight"
Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Coasting
Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐
ing the engine and coasting with the engine
idling.
This function is only available in ECO PRO
mode.
Deactivate the function to use the braking ef‐
fect of the engine when traveling downhill.
ECO PRO seat climate control
The output of seat heating and, where applica‐
ble, seat ventilation is reduced when ECO PRO
is activated.
ECO PRO climate control
Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
Seite 255
Saving fuel Driving tips
255
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or
cooling of the vehicle's interior, fuel consump‐
tion can be economized.
The mirror heating is made available when out‐
side temperatures are very cold.
ECO PRO Sight
The output of exterior mirror heating and rear
window defroster is reduced.
Resetting the settings
To reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the factory
settings:
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
Display in the instrument cluster
Display
When ECO PRO mode is activated, the display
switches to a special configuration.
Some of the displays may differ from the dis‐
play in the instrument cluster.
ECO PRO bonus range
An adjusted driving style helps
you extend your driving range.
This may be displayed as the
bonus range in the instrument
cluster.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
The blue bar segments symbolize the gained
range in stages
The bonus range is automatically reset every
time the vehicle is refueled.
Efficiency display
Display in the instrument cluster
Display in the instrument cluster with ex‐
panded range
A mark in the efficiency display informs about
the current driving style:
▷ Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the
energy recovered by coasting or when
braking.
▷ Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when
accelerating.
ECO PRO tips, driving instructions
As soon as one of the conditions for efficient
driving is no longer fulfilled, a respective ECO
PRO tip is displayed as a symbol in the instru‐
ment cluster.
The arrow indicates that the driving
style can be adjusted to be more fuel
efficient, e.g., by backing off the accel‐
erator.
Seite 256
Driving tips Saving fuel
256
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
The ECO PRO disappears from the display
once the conditions for efficient driving are ful‐
filled again.
ECO PRO tips, symbols
Symbol Measure
For an efficient driving style:
Give less gas, decelerate in advance
or reduce speed to selected ECO
PRO speed.
Steptronic transmission: shift from
M/S to D.
Indications on the Control Display
Displaying EfficientDynamics
information
The current efficiency of the ECO PRO func‐
tions can be displayed on the Control Display.
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
4. Select the symbol.
The following functions are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Coasting.
Displaying fuel consumption history
The average fuel consumption, the route
coasted as well as the duration for which the
Auto Start/Stop function switched off the en‐
gine can be displayed on the Control Display.
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
4. Select the symbol.
Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐
lected route.
Selecting route length
1.
Press button.
2. Select desired route length or scaling.
Resetting fuel consumption history
1.
Press button.
2. "Reset consumption history"
Coasting
Concept
The function helps to conserve fuel.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
sion when selector lever position D is set. The
vehicle continues traveling with the engine
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector
lever position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coast‐
ing.
As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐
tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled
again.
General information
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐
fer to page 254, driving mode.
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control.
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
the function as often as possible and supports
the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.
Functional requirements
In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in
a speed range from approximately
30 mph/50 km/h bis 100 mph/160 km/h, if the
following conditions are met:
Seite 257
Saving fuel Driving tips
257
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
operated.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
Operation via shift paddles
Concept
The coasting driving condition can be influ‐
enced with the shift paddles.
Activating, deactivating coasting via shift
paddles
1.
Using the shift paddle + shift to the highest
gear.
2. Press shift paddle + again to enter coasting
mode.
To deactivate, press shift paddle - .
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
The mark in the efficiency dis‐
play below the tachometer is
backlit in blue and is located at
the zero point. The tachometer
approximately indicates idle
speed.
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
the zero point during coasting.
Display in the instrument cluster with
expanded range
The mark in the efficiency dis‐
play is backlit in blue and is lo‐
cated at the zero point.
The coasting point indicator is il‐
luminated at the zero point dur‐
ing coasting.
Indications on the Control Display
The coasting driving condition is displayed in
EfficientDynamics while driving.
The distance traveled in the coasting driving
condition is displayed in the fuel consumption
history. The counter is reset with every refuel‐
ing.
Color code blue, arrow: coasting driving condi‐
tion.
Displaying EfficientDynamics information
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
System limits
The function is not available under one of the
following conditions.
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low
or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐
sive current.
ECO PRO driving style analysis
Concept
The function helps develop an especially effi‐
cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
Seite 258
Driving tips Saving fuel
258
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Using this indication, the individual driving
style can be oriented toward conserving fuel.
General information
The current trip is assessed.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by
an efficient driving style.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus
range in the instrument cluster and on the
Control Display.
Functional requirement
This function is available in ECO PRO mode.
Calling up ECO PRO driving style
analysis
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Driving style analysis"
Display on the Control Display
The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐
ysis consists of a symbolized route and a
lookup table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐
ing style. The more efficient the driving style,
the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐
row 1.
The table of values contains stars. The more
efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
cluded in the table and the faster the bonus
range increases, arrow 2.
If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of
stars is displayed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips, refer to page 256, are displayed dur‐
ing driving.
Seite 259
Saving fuel Driving tips
259
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Refueling
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
General information
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 264, prior to refueling.
Safety information
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of property
damage. Refuel promptly.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Seite 262
Mobility Refueling
262
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors
can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Pay attention that the retain‐
ing strap is not jammed or crushed when clos‐
ing the lid.◀
1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Observe the following when
refueling
General information
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Safety information
NOTE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐
ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐
tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by
contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the
environment. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Avoid overfilling.◀
Seite 263
Refueling Mobility
263
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in
winter, e.g., helps make a cold start easier.
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐
tent.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refuel‐
ing.
Ethanol should satisfy the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Safety information
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
NOTE
Do not press the Start/Stop button after
refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the
catalytic converter is permanently damaged.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not re‐
fuel or add the following in the case of gasoline
engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, e.g., manganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.◀
NOTE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and the engine. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not use a fuel with a higher etha‐
nol percentage than recommended or one with
other types of alcohol, e.g., M5 to M100.◀
Seite 264
Mobility Fuel
264
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
NOTE
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is a risk of
property damage. Do not fill with fuel that does
not comply with the minimum quality.◀
Recommended fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Seite 265
Fuel Mobility
265
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
WARNING
A tire with low or missing tire inflation
pressure impacts handling, such as steering
and braking response. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
sure, and correct it as needed, e.g., twice a
month and before a long trip.◀
Check the tire inflation pressure of the emer‐
gency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and
correct it as needed.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the tire's
temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐
fications relate to cold tires or tires at ambient
temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire
Monitor.
For Tire Pressure Monitor: perform a reset of
the Tire Pressure Monitor after adjusting tire
pressure to a new value.
Tire inflation pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 267, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 267, and adjust as necessary.
Seite 266
Mobility Wheels and tires
266
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
740Li, 740Li xDrive, 750Li, 750i
xDrive, 750Li xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S A/S RSC
245/50 R 18 100
H M+S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL RSC
2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
Front:
245/45 R 19 98 Y
RSC
2.5 / 36 -
Rear: 275/40 R 19
101 Y RSC
- 2.5 / 36
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front:
245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL RSC
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 275/35 R 20
102 Y XL RSC
- 2.7 / 39
V.: 245/40 R 20 99
V M+S XL RSC
2.7 / 39 -
H.: 275/35 R 20
102 V M+S XL
RSC
- 2.7 / 39
Front:
245/35 R 21 96
Y XL RSC
3.0 / 44 -
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC
- 3.0 / 44
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18
104 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
740Li, 740Li xDrive, 750Li, 750i
xDrive, 750Li xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature
Seite 267
Wheels and tires Mobility
267
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S A/S RSC
245/50 R 18 100
H M+S RSC
2.5 / 36 2.7 / 39
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL RSC
2.7 / 39 2.9 /42
Front:
245/45 R 19 98 Y
RSC
2.5 / 36 -
Rear: 275/40 R 19
101 Y RSC
- 2.5 / 36
Front:
245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL RSC
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 275/35 R 20
102 Y XL RSC
- 2.7 / 39
V.: 245/40 R 20 99
V M+S XL RSC
3.0 / 44 -
H.: 275/35 R 20
102 V M+S XL
RSC
- 3.0 / 44
Front:
245/35 R 21 96
Y XL RSC
3.0 / 44 -
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC
- 3.0 / 44
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18
104 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 18 100
H M+S RSC
2.5 / 36 2.7 / 39
245/45 R 19 102
V M+S XL RSC
2.9 /42 3.1 / 45
Front:
245/45 R 19 98 Y
RSC
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 275/40 R 19
101 Y RSC
- 2.7 / 39
Front:
245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL RSC
3.0 / 44 -
Rear: 275/35 R 20
102 Y XL RSC
- 3.0 / 44
V.: 245/40 R 20
99 V M+S XL
RSC
3.3 / 48 -
H.: 275/35 R 20
102 V M+S XL
RSC
- 3.3 / 48
Front:
245/35 R 21 96
Y XL RSC
3.3 / 48 -
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC
- 3.3 / 48
Emergency
wheel:
T 135/80 R 18
104 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Seite 268
Mobility Wheels and tires
268
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 2116
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
2116: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
DOT … 2116: the tire was manufactured in the
21st week of 2016.
Recommendation
Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera‐
ture A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how‐
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris‐
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Seite 269
Wheels and tires Mobility
269
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Mo‐
tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
Band A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 272, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 inches/3 mm.
There is an increased risk of hydroplaning if
the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in‐
ches/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 inches/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 inches/4 mm, tires
are less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in‐
ches/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Seite 270
Mobility Wheels and tires
270
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Damage can, e.g., be caused by driving over
curbs, road damage, or similar things.
Safety information
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is a risk of an accident. If tire
damage is suspected while driving, immedi‐
ately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and
tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully
to the nearest dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Have vehicle towed or transported as
needed.◀
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is a risk of an accident. Do not
repair damaged tires, but have them re‐
placed.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting and wheel balancing
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as
ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
Safety information
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, e.g., due to contact with the body due to
tolerances despite the same official size rating.
There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you
use wheels and tires that have been recom‐
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your
vehicle type.◀
WARNING
Mounted steel wheels can cause techni‐
cal problems, e.g., independent loosening of
the lug bolts, damage to the brake discs. There
is a risk of an accident. Do not mount steel
wheels.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, BMW recommends certain
tire brands. These can be identified by a star
on the tire sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Seite 271
Wheels and tires Mobility
271
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Retreaded tires
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
ice life can be limited. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Winter tires
General information
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a corresponding information label/
sticker in the field of view. The label is available
from a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere
to the permissible maximum speed.
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. Further information is availa‐
ble from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated between
the axles to achieve even wear. Further infor‐
mation is available from a dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure
and correct, if needed.
Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the
front and rear axles.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐
porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐
cial rims.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driving
with a flat tire.
Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
Seite 272
Mobility Wheels and tires
272
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Further information is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
The compressor can be used to check the tire
inflation pressure.
General information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
electronics checked at the next opportu‐
nity and have them replaced, if needed.
Storage
The Mobility System is in the left storage com‐
partment of the cargo area.
Sealant container
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Seite 273
Wheels and tires Mobility
273
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Compressor
1 Sealant container unlocking
2 Holder for sealant container
3 Inflation pressure dial
4 Reduce inflation pressure
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
Filling the tire with sealant
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
1.
Shake the sealant container.
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover
of the sealant container. Do not kink the
hose.
3. Slide the sealing container into the holder
on the compressor housing, ensuring that
it engages audibly.
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking
wheel.
Seite 274
Mobility Wheels and tires
274
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
5. With the compressor switched off, insert
the plug into the power socket inside the
vehicle.
6. With standby state switched on or the en‐
gine running, switch on the compressor.
NOTE
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to
fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire infla‐
tion pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐
sor at this point.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
1.
Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
pressure gage.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
reached:
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the wheel.
2. Press the red unlock button.
3. Remove the sealant container from the
compressor.
4. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
5. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Stowing the Mobility System
1.
Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the wheel.
2. Press the red unlock button.
3. Remove the sealant container from the
compressor.
4. Wrap the empty sealant container in suita‐
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo
area.
5. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐
cle.
Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Seite 275
Wheels and tires Mobility
275
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Correcting the tire inflation pressure
1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com‐
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at
least 2.0 bar.
▷ To increase pressure: with standby
state switched on or the engine run‐
ning, switch on the compressor.
▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
ton on the compressor.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System as soon as
possible.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on un‐
suitable tires, the snow chains can come into
contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of property damage. Only mount
snow chains on tires that are designated by
their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
snow chains.◀
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 245/50 R 18.
▷ 245/45 R 19.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed ac‐
cording to the snow chain manufacturer's in‐
structions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control to optimize the for‐
ward momentum.
Seite 276
Mobility Wheels and tires
276
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Rear wheel steering during operation
with snow chains
General information
In order to guarantee free running of the
wheels when operating with snow chains, rear
axle steering of the integral active steering
must be switched off when snow chains are
mounted.
Safety information
WARNING
When rear wheel steering is switched on
and snow chains are mounted, there can be
contact between snow chains and the chassis.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of property
damage. With mounted snow chains, switch
off the rear wheel steering.◀
Switching off rear wheel steering
The rear wheel steering is switched off by
specifying that snow chains are installed.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Tire chains"
4. "Tire chains installed"
Starting with the permissible maximum speed
with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h the rear
wheel steering will be switched on again auto‐
matically.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you
if there is a loss of pressure in one or more
tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire
valves measure the tire inflation pressure and
tire temperature.
General information
With use of the system observe further infor‐
mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
fer to page 266.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐
ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is
not assured.
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM can be displayed, e.g., whether or not
the TPM is active.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Tire conditions
General information
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a SMS text message
on the Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning re‐
lated to the tire inflation pressures stored dur‐
ing the last reset.
Seite 277
Wheels and tires Mobility
277
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major drop in tire inflation pressure
in the indicated tires.
Gray wheels
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons
for this may be:
▷ The system is being reset.
▷ Malfunction.
Status information
The status control display additionally shows
the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐
pending on the model, tire temperatures. It
shows the actual values read; they may vary
depending on driving style or weather condi‐
tions.
Resetting the system
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Via iDrive and in the vehicle:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not
drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the sta‐
tus "Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor…" is dis‐
played.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The reset is
completed automatically while driving.
After a successfully completed reset, the
wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See
label for recommended pressures." is dis‐
played.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue the reset resumes automatically.
Messages
Required tire inflation pressure check
message
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ The system has detected a wheel change,
but no reset was done.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
System will issue a warning related to the
tire inflation pressures stored during the
last reset.
▷ Inflation was not carried out according to
specifications.
▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below
the level of the last reset.
In these cases:
1.
Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Reset the system.
Message in case of low tire pressure
The yellow warning lamp lights up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
System will issue a warning related to the
tire inflation pressures stored during the
last reset.
Seite 278
Mobility Wheels and tires
278
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
In these cases:
1. Reduce your speed and drive moderately.
Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, e.g., gas station,
check and correct the tire inflation pres‐
sure in all four tires, if necessary.
3. Reset the system.
Message in case of sharp tire inflation
pressure loss
The yellow warning lamp lights up.
In addition, a symbol with the affected
tires will be displayed in the Check
Control message.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐
flation pressure.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
System will issue a warning related to the
tire inflation pressures stored during the
last reset.
In these cases:
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires.
Follow the information on run-flat tires and
continued driving with these tires.◀
Run-flat tires, refer to page 272, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC
Dynamic Stability Control.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
Check the air pressure in all four tires, e.g.,
using the tire pressure gage of a tire repair
kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been reset. In this case, perform
the reset.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
2.
Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a tire repair kit
or by changing the tire.
Use of sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, may
damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this
case, have the electronics checked at the next
opportunity and have them replaced, if
needed.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently when a
run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is
reduced when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Seite 279
Wheels and tires Mobility
279
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Continued driving with a flat tire
Observe the following when continuing to drive
with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been reset. In this case, perform
the reset.
Possible driving distance with a
depressurized tire
The possible driving distance with a flat tire
depends on cargo load, driving style and road
conditions.
A vehicle with an average load has a possible
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
braking, a longer braking distance and different
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
potholes, etc.
System limits
The system does not function properly if a re‐
set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is
reported though tire inflation pressures are
correct.
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the
sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus
increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire
inflation pressure is reduced when the tire
temperature falls again. These circumstances
may cause a warning when temperatures fall
very sharply.
The system cannot indicate sudden serious
tire damage caused by external circumstances.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and is
then illuminated continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐
tected.
In these cases:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics, such as
an emergency wheel, is mounted: have the
wheels checked, if needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
Seite 280
Mobility Wheels and tires
280
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. This will be
detected and reported as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
sured. Reinitialize the system after each ad‐
justment of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor can
be displayed, e.g., whether the RPA is active.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation pres‐
sures serve as reference values in order to de‐
tect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not
drive off.
5. Start the initialization: "Perform reset"
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Seite 281
Wheels and tires Mobility
281
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
inflation pressure.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires.
Follow the information on run-flat tires and
continued driving with these tires.◀
Run-flat tires, refer to page 272, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on, if needed.
System limits
A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all
four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐
nal circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐
vance.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
Check the air pressure in all four tires, e.g.,
using the tire pressure gage of a tire repair
kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
2.
Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a tire repair kit
or by changing the tire.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently when a
run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is
reduced when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Observe the following when continuing to drive
with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Seite 282
Mobility Wheels and tires
282
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Possible driving distance with a
depressurized tire
The possible driving distance with a flat tire
depends on cargo load, driving style and road
conditions.
A vehicle with an average load has a possible
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
braking, a longer braking distance and different
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
potholes, etc.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire
does not always need to be changed immedi‐
ately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat
tire.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
On soft or slippery ground, e.g., snow,
ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away.
There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the
tire/wheel on a flat, solid and slip-resistant sur‐
face.◀
WARNING
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
designated jacking point, damage to the vehi‐
cle may occur while cranking the vehicle up, or
the vehicle jack can slip away. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the vehicle jack is inserted into the jacking
point next to the wheel house while cranking
the vehicle up.◀
WARNING
The vehicle jack is only provided for
short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
changes. Even if all safety measures are ob‐
served, there is a risk of the raised vehicle fall‐
ing, if the vehicle jack tilts over. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is
raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not
start the engine.◀
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the
vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift
Seite 283
Wheels and tires Mobility
283
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
jack.◀
Securing the vehicle against rolling
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ad‐
ditionally secure the vehicle against rolling
away when changing a wheel.
On a level surface
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in
front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to
the wheel to be changed.
On slight down-hill grades
If a wheel needs to be changed on a slight
down-hill grade, place wheel chocks or other
suitable objects, e.g. a stone, under the wheels
of the front and rear axle.
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic, on solid and slip-re‐
sistant ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or selector lever position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ Depending on the equipment version, get
tools and the emergency wheel from the
vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning lamp at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
reach its carrying capacity because of the
restricted height.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll‐
ing.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the positions shown.
Jacking up the vehicle
1.
Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar‐
row 1, and grasp the crank, arrow 2, with
the other hand.
Seite 284
Mobility Wheels and tires
284
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
WARNING
Hands and fingers can be jammed
when using the vehicle jack. There is a risk
of injury. Comply with the described hand
position and do not change this position
while using the vehicle jack.◀
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point closest to the
wheel to be changed.
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the
crank clockwise.
4. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot is ex‐
tended vertically.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle
jack.
6. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack
is with the entire surface on the ground
and the relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 in‐
ches/3 cm above ground.
Wheel mounting
Mount a maximum of one emergency wheel.
1.
Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel.
2. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and hand-tighten at least two bolts in a
crosswise pattern.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the ve‐
hicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐
companying lug bolts may have to be used
as well.
3. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
Seite 285
Wheels and tires Mobility
285
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
4. Turn the crank of the vehicle jack counter‐
clockwise to retract the vehicle jack and
lower the vehicle.
5. Remove the vehicle jack.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of its
size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Drive to the nearest dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop to have the damaged tire replaced.
Emergency wheel
General information
In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel
can be used instead of the defective tire. The
emergency wheel is provided for temporary
use so that you can have the defective wheel
replaced.
Overview
The emergency wheel and the tools are lo‐
cated in the cargo area under the cargo floor
panel.
Removing the emergency wheel
1.
Pull the cargo floor panel upward directly
behind the rear backrests and remove it.
2. Open the ratchet strap.
3. Remove the tool holder.
4. Remove the emergency wheel from the
storage well. Do not remove any covers.
After the wheel change, insert the tool holder
into the storage well and secure it with the
ratchet straps.
Seite 286
Mobility Wheels and tires
286
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Driving with emergency wheel
WARNING
The emergency wheel has particular di‐
mensions. When driving with an emergency
wheel, changed driving properties may occur
at higher speeds, e.g., reduced lane stability
when braking, longer braking distance and
changed self-steering properties in the limit
area. There is a risk of an accident. Drive mod‐
erately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Seite 287
Wheels and tires Mobility
287
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Washer fluid reservoir
2 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
3 Oil filler neck
4 Coolant reservoir, engine
5 Gasoline engine only: coolant reservoir,
auxiliary cooling
6 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
7 Vehicle identification number
Hood
Safety information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage vehicle compo‐
nents and impair vehicle functions. There is a
risk of personal and property damage. The
manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in
the engine compartment be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
Seite 288
Mobility Engine compartment
288
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
WARNING
The engine compartment accommo‐
dates moving components. Certain compo‐
nents in the engine compartment can also
move with the vehicle switched off, e.g., the ra‐
diator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach
into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of
clothing and hair away from moving parts.◀
WARNING
There are protruding parts, e.g., locking
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk
of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to
protruding parts and keep these areas clear.◀
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of an accident. Stop immediately and cor‐
rectly close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when open‐
ing and closing the hood. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the area of movement of
the hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Opening
1.
Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Closing
Let the hood drop from a height of approx.
16 inches/40 cm and push down on it to lock it
fully.
The hood must engage on both sides.
Seite 289
Engine compartment Mobility
289
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
General information
Engine oil consumption
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
the driving style and driving conditions.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
the following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐
fied as not suitable.
In the case of increased engine oil consump‐
tion, check the engine oil level after refueling.
Electronic oil measurement
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil
measurement.
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles:
▷ Status display.
▷ Detailed measurement.
Electronic oil measurement
Status display
Concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a Check Control message is displayed.
Requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
is displayed.
With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
perform a detailed measurement.
Displaying the engine oil level
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
Engine oil level display messages
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Immediately add engine oil.◀
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of property damage. Do not add too much en‐
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
Seite 290
Mobility Engine oil
290
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Different messages appear on the Control Dis‐
play depending on the engine oil level. Pay at‐
tention to these messages.
If the engine oil level is too low within the next
125 miles/200 km, add engine oil, refer to
page 291.
A red indicator lamp indicates too high
engine oil pressure.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Detailed measurement
General information
A detailed measurement is only possible with
certain engines.
Requirements
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N
or P and accelerator pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
perature.
Performing a detailed measurement
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Measure engine oil level"
5. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Time: approx. 1 minute.
Display on the Control Display
In the detailed measurement the engine oil
level is checked when the vehicle is stationary,
and displayed via a scale.
Gasoline engine:
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a Check Control message is displayed.
Diesel engine:
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Establish idle state and safely park the vehicle
before engine oil is added.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating materials, e.g., oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
ents. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Observe the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.◀
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage.
Add engine oil within the next
125 miles/200 km.◀
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of property damage. Do not add too much en‐
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
Seite 291
Engine oil Mobility
291
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 288.
Adding engine oil
1. Open the hood, refer to page 289.
2. Turn the oil filler neck counterclockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Safety information
NOTE
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
oil additives.◀
NOTE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk
of property damage. When selecting an engine
oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐
rect oil rating.◀
Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rat‐
ing standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
The oil rating BMW Longlife-14 FE+ is only
suitable for particular gasoline engines.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
API SL or superior oil rating.
Viscosity grades
Gasoline engine:
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE
0W-30 or SAE 0W-20. Alternatively, also en‐
gine oils with viscosity grades SAE 5W-20,
SAE 5W-30, SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 can
be used.
The viscosity grades SAE 0W-20 or SAE
5W-20 are only suitable for particular engines.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 292
Mobility Engine oil
292
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Engine oil change
NOTE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.◀
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
the engine oil.
Seite 293
Engine oil Mobility
293
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Coolant
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
General information
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open
the cooling system with the engine cooled
down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of property damage. Do not al‐
low additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐
tives only.◀
Coolant level
General information
Vehicles with gasoline engine feature two
cooling circuits. Always check the coolant lev‐
els of both coolant reservoirs and refill as
needed.
The coolant level is indicted using minimum
and maximum markings. Depending on the
coolant reservoir, the minimum and maximum
markings are located at different locations.
Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐
ant reservoir is located on the right side or the
left side of the engine compartment, refer to
page 288.
Checking the coolant level in the filler
neck
1.
Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks
in the filler neck.
Seite 294
Mobility Coolant
294
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Close the cap.
6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 295
Coolant Mobility
295
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals may vary
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants, and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of the vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐
nizes the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
General information
Information on service requirements, refer to
page 125, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi‐
cle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
Seite 296
Mobility Maintenance
296
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Safety information
NOTE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an
intricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system.
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a
dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or other persons
that have the specialized training and equip‐
ment for purposes of properly utilizing the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Seite 297
Maintenance Mobility
297
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the
left storage compartment of the cargo area.
Wiper blade replacement
Safety information
NOTE
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
shield can be damaged. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐
placing the wiper blades and do not fold down
the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Replacing the front wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer
to page 110, the wiper arms.
2. Lift the wiper all the way off of the wind‐
shield.
3. Press button, arrow 1, and pull out the
wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on
until it you hear it snap into the holder.
5. Fold down the wipers.
Seite 298
Mobility Replacing components
298
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Lights and bulbs
General information
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
All headlights and lights are made using LED
or laser technology.
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source. These light-emitting diodes, which are
related to conventional lasers, are officially
designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you let a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop perform
the work in case of a malfunction.
Safety information
WARNING
Focused laser light can irritate or perma‐
nently damage the retina of the eye. There is a
risk of injury. The manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends that the work on the lighting sys‐
tem including bulb replacement be performed
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.◀
WARNING
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. Do not look directly into the headlights
or other light sources. Do not remove the LED
covers.◀
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the con‐
densation evaporates after a short time. The
headlight glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights switched
on, increasing humidity forms, e.g., water drop‐
lets in the lamp, have the headlights checked.
Vehicle battery
General information
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
After a battery replacement, the manufacturer
of your vehicle recommends that the vehicle
battery be registered on the vehicle by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop to ensure that all comfort
features are fully available and that any Check
Control messages of these comfort features
are no longer displayed.
Safety information
NOTE
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐
cle functions. There is a risk of personal and
property damage. Only vehicle batteries that
are compatible with your vehicle type should
be installed in your vehicle. Information on
compatible vehicle batteries is available at your
dealer’s service center.◀
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by a
red indicator lamp.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
Seite 299
Replacing components Mobility
299
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
Safety information
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 303, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to
be newly initialized or individual settings up‐
dated, for example:
▷ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:
store the positions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Safety information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse.
Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐
stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀
In the cargo area
Remove the cover on the right side trim.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Seite 300
Mobility Replacing components
300
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
The red lamp in the button flashes with the
hazard warning flashers switched on.
Intelligent emergency call
Concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be made through the system.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐
ditions.
Overview
SOS button in the roofliner.
Requirements
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Initiating an Emergency Request
1.
Touch the cover.
2. Press the SOS button and hold until the
LED on the microphone lights up green.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an
Emergency Request has been initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
Display, the Emergency Request can be
aborted.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been
established.
When the Emergency Request is received
at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
Seite 301
Breakdown assistance Mobility
301
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Response Center contacts you and takes
further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW
Response Center which serves to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E.g.,
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
be established.
▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW
Response Center can no longer be heard
via the speaker, you can nevertheless still
be heard at the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐
sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can
be viewed via iDrive or a connection to Road‐
side Assistance can be established directly.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the tailgate.
Press on the release, arrow 1, and swivel the
cover down, arrow 2.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the first-aid kit
contents regularly.
Replace the articles prior to their expiration
date.
Storage
The first-aid kit is located in the left storage
compartment of the cargo area.
Seite 302
Mobility Breakdown assistance
302
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
Preparation
NOTE
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀
1.
Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
Safety information
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a
risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order
during connection.◀
Positive battery terminal
The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐
partment acts as the battery's positive termi‐
nal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
Negative battery terminal
A special nut serves as the negative terminal of
the battery.
Connecting the cables
Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers, such as
the radio, on the assisting and receiving vehi‐
cle.
1.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
Seite 303
Breakdown assistance Mobility
303
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1.
Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Tow-starting and towing
Safety information
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is a risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
NOTE
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
a risk of property damage. The vehicle should
only be transported on a loading platform.◀
NOTE
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
on vehicle parts. There is a risk of property
damage. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
NOTE
With transport on a loading platform, do
not fasten vehicle by the chassis.◀
Transporting the vehicle
General information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a disabled vehicle from the danger
area, it can be pushed for a short distance. The
vehicle can only be pushed in selector lever
position N.
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll, pro‐
ceed as follows:
1.
Switch on drive-ready state, refer to
page 102.
Seite 304
Mobility Breakdown assistance
304
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Engage selector lever position N.
If there is a malfunction, it may happen that
you cannot change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, re‐
fer to page 115, if needed.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden‐
tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign
or a warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is a risk of an accident! Make
sure that the gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
ing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be
towed.◀
NOTE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can
occur. There is a risk of property damage. Cor‐
rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting.◀
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting is found in the onboard vehicle
tool kit, refer to page 298.
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Use tow fitting located in the front only for
positioning the vehicle.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Seite 305
Breakdown assistance Mobility
305
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Safety information
NOTE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there can be damage to the vehicle or to the
tow fitting. There is a risk of property damage.
Observe the notes on using the tow fitting.◀
Screw thread for tow fitting
Push out the cover by pressing on the top
edge.
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the transmission.
Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.
Seite 306
Mobility Breakdown assistance
306
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Vehicle washes
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
leaves in the area below the windshield when
the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle.
Steam blaster and high-pressure
washer
Safety information
NOTE
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high.
There is a risk of property damage. Maintain
sufficient distance and do not spray too long
continuously. Follow the operating instructions
for the high-pressure washer.◀
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 in/30 cm.
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTE
Improper use of automatic vehicle
washes can cause damage to the vehicle.
There is a risk of property damage. Information
the following instructions:
▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
the chassis.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
▷ Deactivate rain sensor, if necessary, to
avoid damage to the wiper system.◀
Before driving into a vehicle wash
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
vehicle wash, take the following steps:
1.
Drive into the vehicle wash.
2. Engage selector lever position N.
3. Deactivate Automatic Hold, refer to
page 107.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Switch off drive-ready state.
In this way, standby state remains
switched on, and a Check Control mes‐
sage is displayed.
Seite 307
Care Mobility
307
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
NOTE
Selector lever position P is automati‐
cally engaged when standby state is
switched off. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not switch standby state off in
vehicle washes.◀
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
the outside when in selector lever position N. A
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock
the vehicle.
Exiting a vehicle wash
To switch on drive-ready state:
1.
Make sure that the vehicle key is in the ve‐
hicle.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐
ping on the brake turns standby state off.
Selector lever position
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷ With standby state switched off.
▷ After approx. 35 minutes.
Headlamps
Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
acidic cleansers.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, e.g., from in‐
sects, with shampoo and wash off with water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced. The heat generated during
braking dries brake discs and brake pads and
protects them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
General information
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care
products are available from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that
are dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the in‐
terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐
low the instructions on the container.◀
Vehicle paint
General information
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your vehicle care to
these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Matte finish
Only use cleaning and care products suitable
for vehicles with matte finish. The cleaning and
Seite 308
Mobility Care
308
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
care products are available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Upholstery material care
General information
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vac‐
uum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage
stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth
with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
Safety information
NOTE
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
a risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐
cro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disk.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use
only water and suitable cleaning agents for
cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Plastic components
NOTE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
Seite 309
Care Mobility
309
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
plastic parts. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen
cloth lightly with water.◀
Plastic components are e.g.:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Safety belts
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the
safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect
of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution
for cleaning the safety belts.◀
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the
installed belt straps.
Do not retract the safety belts until they are
dry.
Carpets and floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, e.g., for cleaning.◀
The floor mats can be removed from the vehi‐
cle's interior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Displays/screens/protective glass of
the Head-up Display
NOTE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
and screens. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
cloth.◀
NOTE
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
play, refer to page 132, using a microfiber cloth
and commercially available dish-washing soap.
Long-term vehicle storage
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be
taken. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 310
Mobility Care
310
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Seite 311
Care Mobility
311
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
General information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
e.g., due to the selected special equipment,
country version or country-specific measure‐
ment method. Detailed values can be found in
the approval documents, on labels on the vehi‐
cle or can be obtained from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority over the information in this
Owner's Manual.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, e.g., a roof antenna, roof racks
or spoiler. The heights can deviate, e.g., due to
the selected special equipment, tires, load and
chassis version.
BMW 7 Series Sedan
Width with mirrors inches/mm 85.4/2,169
Width without mirrors inches/mm 74.9/1,902
Height inches/mm 57.8/1,467
Height L-models inches/mm 58.2/1,479
Length inches/mm 201.1/5,108
Length L-models inches/mm 206.6/5,248
Wheelbase inches/mm 120.9/3,070
Wheelbase L-models inches/mm 126.4/3,210
Seite 314
Reference Technical data
314
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
BMW 7 Series Sedan
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 41.1/12.5
Smallest turning radius diam. L-models ft/m 42.0-42.4/12.8-12.9
Weights
Canada only: 750i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,706/2,588
Load lbs/kg 959/435
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,840/1,288
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,060/1,388
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
Cargo area capacity cu ft 18.2
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 18.1/515
740Li
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,450/2,472
Load lbs/kg 959/435
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,586/1,173
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,029/1,374
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 100/45
Cargo area capacity cu ft 18.2
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 18.1/515
740Li xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,604/2,542
Load lbs/kg 959/435
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,716/1,232
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,064/1,390
Seite 315
Technical data Reference
315
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
740Li xDrive
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 100/45
Cargo area capacity cu ft 18.2
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 18.1/515
750Li
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,714/2,592
Load lbs/kg 959/435
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,780/1,261
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,131/1,420
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 100/45
Cargo area capacity cu ft 18.2
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 18.1/515
750Li xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,871/2,663
Load lbs/kg 959/435
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,899/1,315
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,139/1,424
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 100/45
Cargo area capacity cu ft 18.2
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 18.1/515
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 20.6/78.0 Fuel quality, refer to
page 264
Seite 316
Reference Technical data
316
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Updates made after the
editorial deadline
These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual
contain updates made after the editorial dead‐
line.
▷ Remote control: overview, refer to page 56.
▷ Airbags: protective effect: information on
the optimum protective effect of the air‐
bags, refer to page 142.
LTE-Compensator - Information and
User Manual
Your car is equipped with a wireless charging
tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone and
connect it to the mobile network. To ensure
the best possible connection a signal booster
(LTE-Compensator) is used in conjunction
with the WCA. The following paragraphs refer
to this booster:
This is a CONSUMER device.
BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS
DEVICE with your wireless provider and have
your provider´s consent. Most wireless provid‐
ers consent to the use of Compensators.
Some providers may not consent to the use of
this device on their network. If you are unsure,
contact your provider. You MUST operate this
device with approved antennas and cables as
specified by the manufacturer. Antennas
MUST be installed at least 20 cm (8 inches)
from any person. You MUST cease operating
this device immediately if requested by the
FCC or a licensed wireless service provider.
WARNING E911 location information may not
be provided or may be inaccurate for calls
served by using this device.
Please observe additionally the following infor‐
mation
Before use you must register your booster de‐
vice with your wireless provider.
▷ Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to regis‐
ter their signal boosters by calling their toll-
free number.
▷ T-Mobile online registration link: (www.T-
Mobile.com/BoosterRegistration); (https://
saqat.t-mobile.com/sites/SignalBooster#).
▷ Verizon’s online registration link: (http://
www.verizonwireless.com/wcms/
consumer/register-signal-booster.html).
▷ AT&T online registration link (https://
securec45.securewebsession.com/
attsignalbooster.com/).
▷ U.S.Cellular online registration link (http://
www.uscellular.com/uscellular/support/fcc-
booster-registration.jsp).
If you should be requested by the FCC to
cease operating your booster you are not al‐
lowed to insert your mobile phone in the
charging tray anymore unless the booster is
permanently deactivated by your local BMW
dealer.
You must not remove the booster from the car
nor use it with any other than the pre-installed
coupling device or antenna. Any modification
of the existing antenna or coupling device as
well as the use of other antennas or coupling
devices will cause the cease of the booster´s
operating license.
The booster device fulfils the network protec‐
tion standards as required by the FCC, such as
intermodulation limits, oscillation detection
and gain limits.
Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive
Model Number: LTECOMPB0
Part Number: 6803145-01
FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0
Seite 317
Appendix Reference
317
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 169
ACC, Active Cruise Control
with Stop&Go function 175
Acceleration Assistant, see
Launch Control 116
Accessories and parts 8
Accident prevention, see Ac‐
tive Protection 166
Activated-charcoal filter 216
Activating gesture control 30
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 158
Active comfort chassis 211
Active Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function,
ACC 175
Active Protection 166
Active roll stabilization 211
Active seat ventilation 96
Active Steering, integral 171
Adaptive brake assistant 169
Adaptive brake lights, see
Brake force display 165
ADAPTIVE driving mode, see
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 116
Adaptive Light Control 136
ADAPTIVE, see Driving Dy‐
namics Control 116
Additives, oil 292
Adjustments, seats/head re‐
straints 80
After washing vehicle 308
Airbags 141
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 143
Air circulation, see Recircu‐
lated-air mode 214
Air, dehumidifying, see Cool‐
ing function 213
Air distribution, manual 215
Air flow, automatic climate
control 215
Air outlets, see Ventila‐
tion 216
Air pressure, tires 266
Air suspension 210
Alarm system 72
Alarm, unintentional 74
All-season tires, see Winter
tires 272
All-wheel-drive, see
xDrive 171
Alternative oil types 292
Ambient air package 221
Ambient highlight 140
Ambient light 139
Animal detection, see Night
Vision 152
Antifreeze, washer fluid 111
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 169
Anti-slip control, see
DSC 169
Anti-theft protection, vehi‐
cle 57
App, BMW Driver’s Guide 6
Approach control warning
with City light braking func‐
tion 146
Approach control warning
with light braking func‐
tion 146
Approved axle load 315
Armrest heating 95
Arrival time 130
Ashtray 228
Ashtray, front 228
Ashtray, rear 228
Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
tance 302
Assistance when driving
off 169
Attentiveness assistant 167
AUC Automatic Recirculating
Air Control 214
Audio 6
AUTO H button 105
AUTO H button, see Auto‐
matic Hold 105
AUTO intensity 214
Automatic climate con‐
trol 212
Automatic cruise control with
Stop&Go function 175
Automatic Curb Monitor 91
Automatic deactivation,
Front-seat passenger air‐
bags 143
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 135
Automatic Hold 105
Automatic locking 72
Automatic Recirculating Air
Control AUC 214
Automatic Soft Closing 69
Automatic transmission, see
Steptronic transmis‐
sion 112
Automatic unlocking 72
Automatic vehicle wash 307
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 213
AUTO program, intensity 214
Auto Start/Stop function 103
Auto washing 307
Average fuel consump‐
tion 129
Average speed 129
Axle loads, weights 315
Seite 318
Reference Everything from A to Z
318
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
B
Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
bar support 81
Backrest, seats 80
Backrest, width 82
Band-aids, see First-aid
kit 302
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 299
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 58
Battery, vehicle 299
Being towed, see Tow-start‐
ing and towing 304
Belts, safety belts 85
Beverage holder, cup
holder 238
Blinds, sun protection 76
Blocking, power window 75
Bluetooth connection 43
BMW Assist 6
BMW display key 59
BMW display key, malfunc‐
tion 62
BMW Driver’s Guide app 6
BMW Gesture Control 30
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 296
BMW Touch Command 36
Bonus range, ECO PRO 256
Bottle holder, see Cup
holder 238
Brake assistant 169
Brake assistant, adaptive 169
Brake discs, break-in 248
Brake force display 165
Brake lights, adaptive 165
Brake lights, brake force dis‐
play 165
Brake pads, break-in 248
Braking, information 249
Breakdown assis‐
tance 301, 302
Break-in 248
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 40
Bulb replacement 299
Bulb replacement, front 299
Bulb replacement, front
lamps 299
Bulb replacement, rear 299
Bulb replacement, tail
lamps 299
Bulbs and lights 299
Button, Start/Stop 102
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐
ing 303
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 8
Calling up mirror adjust‐
ment 72
Calling up seat adjust‐
ment 72
Calling up steering wheel ad‐
justment 72
Camera-based assistance
systems, see Intelligent
Safety 144
Camera lenses, care 310
Camera, rearview camera,
without Surround View 190
Camera, see Surround
View 192
Can holder, see Cup
holder 238
Care, displays 310
Care, vehicle 308
Care, washing the vehi‐
cle 307
Cargo 240
Cargo area 0 , 240
Cargo area, loading 241
Cargo, stowing and secur‐
ing 241
Cargo straps 241
Carpet, care 310
Cartridge replacement, see
Ambient air package 221
Catalytic converter, see Hot
exhaust system 249
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 296
Center armrest 237
Center console 16
Central locking system 64
Central screen, see Control
Display 21
Changes, technical, see Own
Safety 7
Changing parts 298
Changing wheels 283
Changing wheels/tires 271
Chassis number, see Vehicle
identification number 10
Check Control 120
Checking the engine oil level
electronically 290
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 290
Children, seating position 98
Children, transporting
safely 98
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 100
Child restraint system 98
Child restraint systems,
mounting 99
Child safety locks 101
Child seat, mounting 99
Child seats 98
Chrome parts, care 309
Cigarette lighter 228
Cleaning, displays 310
Climate control 212
Climate control on roof‐
liner 219
Closing the tailgate with no-
touch activation 66
Clothes hooks 239
Coasting 257
Coasting with engine decou‐
pled, coasting 257
Seite 319
Everything from A to Z Reference
319
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Coasting with idling en‐
gine 257
Combination switch, see Turn
signals 108
Combination switch, see
Wiper system 108
Comfort Access 65
COMFORT driving mode, see
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 116
COMFORT PLUS driving
mode, see Driving Dynamics
Control 116
COMFORT PLUS, see Driv‐
ing Dynamics Control 116
COMFORT, see Driving Dy‐
namics Control 116
Communication 6
Compact wheel, see Emer‐
gency wheel 286
Compartments in the
doors 236
Compressor 273
Computer, see Onboard com‐
puter 128
Condensation on win‐
dows 215
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 250
Condition Based Service
CBS 296
Confirmation signal 72
ConnectedDrive 6
ConnectedDrive Services 6
Connecting device 42
Connecting electrical devices,
see Sockets 230
Connecting mobile phone 42
Connecting smartphone 42
Connecting telephone 42
Connections 42
Connections, Screen Mirror‐
ing 46
Container for washer
fluid 111
Continued driving with a flat
tire 280, 282
Control Display 21
Control Display, settings 38
Controller 22
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 169
Convenient opening with the
remote control 57
Coolant 294
Coolant level 294
Coolant temperature 124
Cooler 233
Cooling function 213
Cooling, maximum 213
Cooling system 294
Corrosion on brake discs 250
Cosmetic mirror 227
Coupling, see Pairing 42
Crossing traffic warning 207
Cruise control 173
Cruise control, active with
Stop&Go function 175
Cruise control with distance
control, see active cruise
control, ACC 175
Cruise control without dis‐
tance control, see cruise
control 173
Cup holder 238
Current fuel consumption,
onboard computer 129
D
Damage, tires 270
Damping control, dy‐
namic 211
Data protection, settings 41
Data, technical 314
Date 39
Daytime running lights 136
Defrosting, see Windows, de‐
frosting 215
Dehumidifying, air 213
Deleting personal data 41
Deletion of personal data 41
Departure time, parked-vehi‐
cle ventilation 220
Destination distance 130
Device list 42
Digital clock 124
Dimensions 314
Dimmable exterior mirrors 91
Dimmable interior mirror 91
Direction indicator, see Turn
signals 108
Display in windshield 132
Display key, BMW display
key 59
Display key, malfunction 62
Display lighting, see Instru‐
ment lighting 138
Displays 119
Displays, care 310
Disposal, coolant 295
Disposal, vehicle battery 300
Distance control, see
PDC 185
Distance to destination 130
Divided screen view, split
screen 27
Door handle lighting, see wel‐
come lights 135
Door lock, see Remote con‐
trol 56
Drive-off assistant 169
Drive-off assistant, see
DSC 169
Drive-ready state, idle state,
and standby state 19
Drive-ready state, see start‐
ing the engine 102
Driver profiles 69
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 116
Driving instructions, break-
in 248
Driving instructions, ECO
PRO 256
Driving mode 116
Driving notes, general 248
Seite 320
Reference Everything from A to Z
320
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Driving on racetracks 251
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 169
Driving style analysis 258
Driving tips 248
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 169
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 170
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 211
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 169
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 170
E
ECO PRO 254
ECO PRO, bonus range 256
ECO PRO display 254
ECO PRO driving mode 254
ECO PRO driving mode, see
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 116
ECO PRO driving style analy‐
sis 258
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL driv‐
ing mode, see Driving Dy‐
namics Control 116
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 116
ECO PRO mode 254
ECO PRO, see Driving Dy‐
namics Control 116
ECO PRO tips 256
Efficiency display, ECO
PRO 256
Electronic oil measure‐
ment 290
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, see DSC 169
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 263
Emergency Request 301
Emergency service, see
Roadside Assistance 302
Emergency unlocking, tail‐
gate 69
Emergency unlocking, trans‐
mission lock 115
Emergency wheel 286
Energy recovery, onboard
computer 129
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 103
Engine, automatic switch-on/
off 103
Engine compartment 288
Engine compartment, work‐
ing in 288
Engine coolant 294
Engine idling when driving,
coasting 257
Engine oil 290
Engine oil, adding 291
Engine oil additives 292
Engine oil change 293
Engine oil filler neck 291
Engine oil temperature 124
Engine oil types, suitable 292
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 303
Engine start, see drive-ready
state 102
Engine stopping, see drive-
ready state 102
Engine temperature 124
Entering a vehicle wash 307
Entertainment 6
Equipment, interior 225
Error displays, see Check
Control 120
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, see DSC 169
Exchanging wheels/tires 271
Executive Drive Pro 211
Executive Lounge Seating 94
Exhaustion warner 167
Exhaust system 249
Exiting a vehicle wash 307
Exterior lighting during un‐
locking 57
Exterior lighting with the vehi‐
cle locked 57
Exterior mirror, Automatic
Curb Monitor 91
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 91
Exterior mirrors 90
External start 303
External temperature dis‐
play 124
External temperature warn‐
ing 124
Eyes for securing cargo 241
F
Failure message, see Check
Control 120
False alarm, see Unintentional
alarm 74
Fan, see Air flow 215
Filler neck for engine oil 291
Fine wood, care 309
First-aid kit 302
Flat tire, changing
wheels 283
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 281
Flat tire, repairing 273
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 277
Flat tire, warning
lamp 279, 282
Flooding 249
Floor carpet, care 310
Floor mats, care 310
Fold-away position,
wiper 110
Folding table in the rear 232
Foot brake 249
Fragrance cartridge, see Am‐
bient air package 221
Fragrance, see Ambient air
package 221
Seite 321
Everything from A to Z Reference
321
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Fragrancing, see Ambient air
package 221
Front airbags 141
Front center armrest 237
Front cup holder 238
Front fog lights 138
Front passenger seat, adjust‐
ing 82
Front-seat passenger airbags,
automatic deactivation 143
Front-seat passenger airbags,
indicator lamp 144
Front seats 80
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 281
Fuel 264
Fuel cap 262
Fuel consumption display,
onboard computer 129
Fuel consumption, see Aver‐
age fuel consumption 129
Fuel filler flap 262
Fuel gauge 123
Fuel quality 264
Fuel recommendation 264
Fuel, tank capacity 316
Fuse 300
G
Garage door opener, see Uni‐
versal Integrated Remote
Control 225
Gasoline 264
Gear change, Steptronic
transmission 112
Gear shift indicator 126
General driving notes 248
General settings 38
Gentleman function 82
Gesture 30
Gesture control 30
Gesture operation 30
Glare shield 227
Glass sunroof, electric 77
Glass sunroof, initialize the
system 79
Glove compartment 235
GPS location, vehicle posi‐
tion 39
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 315
H
Handbrake, see Parking
brake 105
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 226
Hand movement 30
Hazard warning flashers 301
Head airbags 141
Headlamp control, auto‐
matic 135
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture 135
Headlamps, care 308
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture, switching on 58
Headlight flasher 108
Headlight glass 299
Head restraint pillows 89
Head restraints 80
Head restraints, front 86
Head restraints, rear 88
Head-up Display 132
Head-up Display, care 310
Heavy cargo, stowing
cargo 241
High-beam Assistant 136
High beams 108
High beams/low beams, see
High-beam Assistant 136
Hills 250
Hill start assistant, see Drive-
off assistant 169
Holder for beverages 238
Homepage 6
Hood 288
Horn 14
Hotel function, tailgate 68
Hot exhaust system 249
HUD Head-up Display 132
Hydroplaning 249
I
iBrake — Post Crash 167
Ice warning, see External
temperature warning 124
Icy roads, see External tem‐
perature warning 124
Identification marks, tires 269
Identification number, see Ve‐
hicle identification num‐
ber 10
Idle state, standby state, and
drive-ready state 19
iDrive 21
Ignition key, see Remote con‐
trol 56
Indication of a flat
tire 279, 282
Indicator/warning lights, see
Check Control 120
Individual air distribution 215
Individual settings, see driver
profiles 69
Inflation pressure, tires 266
Inflation pressure warning
FTM, tires 281
Information 6
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 278
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 281
Instrument cluster 119
Instrument lighting 138
Integral Active Steering 171
Integrated key 63
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle 51
Intelligent emergency
call 301
Intelligent Safety 144
Intended use 7
Intensity, AUTO pro‐
gram 214
Interior equipment 225
Seite 322
Reference Everything from A to Z
322
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Interior lights 138
Interior lights during unlock‐
ing 57
Interior lights with the vehicle
locked 57
Interior mirror, automatic dim‐
ming feature 91
Interior motion sensor 73
Internet page 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 125
In the vicinity of the center
console 16
In the vicinity of the roof‐
liner 18
In the vicinity of the steering
wheel 14
Ionization, see Ambient air
package 221
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 284
Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐
sion 112
Jump-starting 303
K
Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐
cess 65
Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐
mission 112
Knee airbag 142
L
Label on recommended
tires 271
Lamp in the exterior mirror,
see Active Blind Spot De‐
tection 158
Lamp in the exterior mirror,
see crossing traffic warn‐
ing 207
Lamp replacement 299
Lamp replacement, front 299
Lamp replacement, rear 299
Lane departure warning 155
Lane threshold, warning 155
Language, on the Control
Display 38
Laser high beams 137
Lashing eyes 241
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 100
Launch Control 116
Leather, care 309
LEDs, replace light-emitting
diodes 299
Light-alloy wheels, care 309
Light carpet, see welcome
lights 135
Light control 136
Lighting 134
Lights 134
Lights and bulbs 299
Light switch 134
List of all messages 40
Load 241
Loading 240
Locking, automatic 72
Locking, settings 71
Low beams 134
Low beams, automatic, see
High-beam Assistant 136
Lower back support 81
Luggage rack, see Roof-
mounted luggage rack 251
Lumbar support 81
M
Maintenance 296
Maintenance require‐
ments 296
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 125
Maintenance system,
BMW 296
Make-up mirror 227
Malfunction, BMW display
key 62
Malfunction displays, see
Check Control 120
Malfunction, remote con‐
trol 59
Manual air distribution 215
Manual air flow 215
Manual brake, see Parking
brake 105
Manual mode, Steptronic
transmission 112
Manual operation, exterior
mirrors 90
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 263
Marking, run-flat tires 272
Massage seat, front 93
Massage seat, rear 93
Master key, see Remote con‐
trol 56
Matte finish 308
Maximum cooling 213
Maximum speed, display 126
Maximum speed, winter
tires 272
Measurement, units of 39
Medical kit 302
Memory for seat, mirrors,
steering wheel 92
Menu in instrument clus‐
ter 127
Menus 23
Menus, operating, iDrive 21
Messages 40
Messages, see Check Con‐
trol 120
Microfilter 216
Minimum tread, tires 270
Mirror 90
Mirror memory 92
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 249
Mobility System 273
Modifications, technical, see
Own Safety 7
Seite 323
Everything from A to Z Reference
323
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Moisture in headlight 299
Monitor, see Control Dis‐
play 21
Mounting of child restraint
systems 99
Moving sun visor 227
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 14
Multimedia 6
N
Navigation 6
Near-field communication 44
Neck restraints, front, see
Head restraints 86
Neck restraints, rear, see
Head restraints 88
Neutral cleaner, see Wheel
cleaner 309
New wheels and tires 271
NFC, see near-field commu‐
nication 44
Night Vision 152
Night Vision device, see Night
Vision 152
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 297
OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐
agnosis 297
Object detection, see Night
Vision 152
Octane rating, see Recom‐
mended fuel grade 265
Odometer 129
Oil 290
Oil, adding 291
Oil additives 292
Oil change 293
Oil change interval, service
requirements 125
Oil filler neck 291
Oil types, alternative 292
Oil types, suitable 292
Old batteries, disposal 300
Onboard computer, Control
Display 130
Onboard computer, instru‐
ment cluster 128
Onboard monitor, see Control
Display 21
Onboard vehicle tool kit 298
Opening and closing 56
Opening the tailgate with no-
touch activation 66
Operating concept, iDrive 21
Operating via iDrive 23
Operating with the control‐
ler 23
Operation via touchscreen 25
Optional equipment 7
Outside air, see AUC 214
Overheating of engine, see
Coolant temperature 124
Own Safety 7
P
Paint, vehicle 308
Panic mode 73
Panorama View, see Sur‐
round View 192
Panoramic glass sunroof 77
Parallel parking assistant 198
Park Distance Control
PDC 185
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 250
Parked-vehicle ventila‐
tion 219
Parking aid, see PDC 185
Parking assistant 198
Parking assistant Plus, Re‐
mote Control Parking 203
Parking brake 105
Parking lights 134
Parking with Automatic
Hold 105
Parts and accessories 8
Passenger's side mirror, tilt‐
ing downward 91
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 185
Pedestrian detection, see
Night Vision 152
Personal profile, see driver
profiles 69
Person warning with City light
braking function 149
Pillows 89
Pinch protection system,
glass sunroof 79
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 75
Plastic, care 309
Post Crash — iBrake 167
Power failure 300
Power sunroof, glass 77
Power windows 74
Prescribed engine oil
types 292
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 266
Pressure warning FTM,
tires 281
Profiles, see driver profiles 69
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 28
Protective function, glass
sunroof 79
Protective function, win‐
dows 75
Push-and-turn reel, refer to
controller 22
Q
Queuing Assistant, see
Steering and lane control as‐
sistant incl. Traffic Jam As‐
sist 182
R
Racetrack operation 251
Seite 324
Reference Everything from A to Z
324
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Radiator fluid 294
Radio 6
Radio-operated key, see Re‐
mote control 56
Rain sensor 109
Ratchet straps 241
Rear automatic climate con‐
trol 217
Rear axle steering 171
Rear center armrest 237
Rear collision prevention 164
Rear collision warning, see
Rear collision preven‐
tion 164
Rear cooler 233
Rear drink holder 239
Rear seats 82
Rear vanity mirror 91
Rearview camera, see Sur‐
round View 192
Rearview camera, without
Surround View 190
Rearview mirror 90
Rear window defroster 216
Recirculated-air mode 214
Recommended fuel
grade 265
Recommended tire
brands 271
Refueling 262
Remote control 56
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 59
Remote Control Parking,
Parking assistant Plus 203
Remote control, univer‐
sal 225
Remote control with dis‐
play 59
Remote control with display,
malfunction 62
Replace front fog lamps 299
Replace front lamps 299
Replace headlights 299
Replace key lights 299
Replace laser headlights 299
Replace LED front fog
lamps 299
Replace LED headlights 299
Replace light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 299
Replacement fuse 300
Replace tail lamps 299
Replacing parts 298
Replacing wheels/tires 271
Reporting safety malfunc‐
tions 10
RES CNCL button, see Active
Cruise Control, ACC 175
RES CNCL button, see Cruise
control 173
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 278
Retreaded tires 272
Roadside parking lights 135
Roller sunblinds 76
Rolling code hand-held trans‐
mitter 226
RON recommended fuel
grade 265
Roofliner 18
Roof load capacity 315
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 251
RSC Run Flat System Com‐
ponent, see Run-flat
tires 272
Rubber components,
care 309
Run-flat tires 272
S
Safe braking 249
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passen‐
ger seat 86
Safety belts 85
Safety belts, care 310
Safety belts, rear 86
Safety locks, doors, and win‐
dows 101
Safety package, see Active
Protection 166
Safety switch, windows 75
Safety systems, airbags 141
Safety systems, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 144
Saving fuel 253
Screen Mirroring, connec‐
tion 46
Screen, see Control Dis‐
play 21
Screen tilt, adjusting 84
Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit 298
Sealant 273
Seat belts, see Safety
belts 85
Seat cushion heating 95
Seat heating 95
Seating position for chil‐
dren 98
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory 92
Seats 80
Seats, front 80
Seats rear 82
Seat ventilation 96
Securing cargo 241
Selection list in instrument
cluster 127
Selector lever, Steptronic
transmission 112
Self-leveling suspension 210
Sensors, care 310
Service and warranty 8
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service
CBS 296
Service requirements, dis‐
play 125
Service, Roadside Assis‐
tance 302
Services, ConnectedDrive 6
SET button, see Active
Cruise Control, ACC 175
Seite 325
Everything from A to Z Reference
325
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
SET button, see Cruise con‐
trol 173
Settings, locking/unlock‐
ing 71
Settings on the Control Dis‐
play 38
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
rors, steering wheel 92
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 112
Shoulder support front 82
Shoulder support rear 84
Side airbag 141
Side collision warning 162
Signaling, horn 14
Signals when unlocking 72
Sitting safely 80
Size 314
Ski and snowboard bag 244
Slide/tilt glass roof 77
Smoker's package 228
SMS SMS text message,
supplementary 123
Snow chains 276
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 297
Sockets 230
Software update 48
SOS button 301
Spare fuse 300
Spare tire, see Emergency
wheel 286
Speed, average 129
Speed Limit Info 126
Speed limits, display 126
Speed warning 131
Split screen 27
Sport displays, torque dis‐
play, performance dis‐
play 131
SPORT driving mode, see
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 116
SPORT INDIVIDUAL driving
mode, see Driving Dynamics
Control 116
SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 116
Sport program, Steptronic
transmission 112
SPORT, see Driving Dynam‐
ics Control 116
Stability control systems 169
Standard equipment 7
Standard position, rear
seats 84
Standby state 19
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 103
Start/Stop button 102
Starting, see drive-ready
state 102
Starting the engine, see
drive-ready state 102
Status control display,
tires 277
Status information, iDrive 27
Status of Owner's Manual 7
Status, vehicle 131
Steering and lane control as‐
sistant incl. Traffic Jam As‐
sist 182
Steering, Integral Active
Steering 171
Steering wheel, adjusting 92
Steering wheel heating 92
Steering wheel memory 92
Steptronic Sport transmis‐
sion, see Steptronic trans‐
mission 112
Steptronic transmission 112
Stopping the engine, see
drive-ready state 102
Storage compartment in the
center console 236
Storage compartments 235
Storage compartments, loca‐
tions 235
Storage, tires 272
Storing the vehicle 310
Stowing and securing
cargo 241
Suitable devices 43
Suitable engine oil types 292
Suitable mobile phones 43
Summer tires, tread 270
Sun visor 227
Supplementary SMS SMS
text message 123
Surround View 192
Suspension settings 116
Switch for driving dynam‐
ics 116
Switch, see Cockpit 14
Symbols 6
Symbols in the status field 28
SYNC program, automatic cli‐
mate control 215
T
Table 232
Tablet 36
Tachometer 124
Tailgate 67
Tailgate, closing with no-
touch activation 66
Tailgate, emergency unlock‐
ing 69
Tailgate, hotel function 68
Tailgate, opening with no-
touch activation 66
Tailgate via remote con‐
trol 58
Technical changes, see Own
Safety 7
Technical data 314
Telephone 6
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 213
Temperature display for ex‐
ternal temperature 124
Temperature, engine oil 124
Terminal, starting aid 303
Theft alarm system, see
Alarm system 72
Seite 326
Reference Everything from A to Z
326
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Thermal camera, see Night
Vision 152
Through-loading system 242
Tilt alarm sensor 73
Time 38
Time of arrival 130
Tire damage 270
Tire identification marks 269
Tire inflation pressure 266
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, see FTM 281
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 277
Tire repair kit, see Mobility
System 273
Tires, changing 271
Tire sealant, see Mobility
System 273
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 266
Tires, run-flat tires 272
Tire tread 270
Tone 6
Tool 298
Total vehicle weight 315
Touch Command 36
Touchpad 26
Touchscreen 25
Towing 304
Tow-starting 304
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 277
Traction control 170
TRACTION, driving dynam‐
ics 170
Traffic Jam Assist, see Steer‐
ing and lane control assis‐
tant 182
Transmission lock, electronic
unlocking 115
Transmission, see Steptronic
transmission 112
Transporting children
safely 98
Tread, tires 270
Trip computer 130
Trip information, see Onboard
computer on the Control
Display 130
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 108
Trip odometer 129
Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐
eter 129
Turn signal, bulb replace‐
ment 299
Turn signals, operation 108
U
Unintentional alarm 74
Units of measurement 39
Universal remote control 225
Unlock button, Steptronic
transmission 112
Unlocking, automatic 72
Unlocking, settings 71
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Upholstery care 309
USB connection 45
USB interface, position in ve‐
hicle 231
Use, intended 7
V
Vanity mirror 227
Variable steering, Integral Ac‐
tive Steering 171
Vehicle battery 299
Vehicle battery, replac‐
ing 299
Vehicle, break-in 248
Vehicle care 308
Vehicle care products 308
Vehicle features and op‐
tions 7
Vehicle identification num‐
ber 10
Vehicle jack 284
Vehicle key, see Remote con‐
trol 56
Vehicle paint 308
Vehicle position, GPS loca‐
tion 39
Vehicle status 131
Vehicle storage 310
Vehicle wash 307
Vehicle, washing 307
Ventilation 216
Ventilation, see Parked-vehi‐
cle ventilation 219
Venting, see Ventilation 216
Vent, see Ventilation 216
Video 6
VIN, see Vehicle identification
number 10
Vitality program 95
Vitalization programs, see Vi‐
tality program 95
Voice activation system 33
W
Warning against cross traf‐
fic 207
Warning and indicator lamps,
see Check Control 120
Warning displays, see Check
Control 120
Warning lamp in the exterior
mirror, see Active Blind Spot
Detection 158
Warning lamp in the exterior
mirror, see crossing traffic
warning 207
Warning messages, see
Check Control 120
Warning triangle 302
Warranty 7
Washer fluid 111
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 110
Washer system 108
Washing the vehicle 307
Water on roads 249
Seite 327
Everything from A to Z Reference
327
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
Weights 315
Welcome Light Carpet, see
welcome lights 135
Welcome lights 135
Welcome lights during un‐
locking 57
Welcome screen 69
Wheel cleaner 309
Wheels, changing 271
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 266
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 281
Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 277
WiFi connection 46
Window defroster, rear 216
Windows, powered 74
Windshield washer fluid 111
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 110
Windshield washer sys‐
tem 108
Windshield washer system,
see washer/wiper sys‐
tem 108
Windshield wiper, see Wiper
system 108
Winter storage, care 310
Winter tires, suitable
tires 272
Winter tires, tread 270
Wiper 108
Wiper blades, replacing 298
Wiper fluid 111
Wiper, fold-away posi‐
tion 110
Wiper system 108
Wood, care 309
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 24
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
tool kit 298
X
xDrive 171
Seite 328
Reference Everything from A to Z
328
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
0140 2 974 740 ue
*BL297474000B*
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 974 740 - VI/16
